Operation Manual
HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle’s
parking brake and depending on your vehicle, additional installation may be required. For
more information, please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Manual Overview
This manual provides the important information you need to make full use of your new navigation sys-
tem. The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation. The later
sections describe the details of the navigation functions.
Chapters 10 to 16 describe how to operate the AV functions. Please read these chapters when you use
a disc in the built-in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation sys-
tem.
How to use this manual
Be sure to read the following descriptions
This provides a licence agreement of this software. Be sure to read this before using the software.
This provides the date when the Map Database was recorded.
This provides the copyright of the Map Database.
To find the operation procedure from what you want to do
When you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the “Table of Con-
tents”.
To find the operation procedure from a menu name
If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page
from the “Display Information” at the end of the manual.
Glossary
The section at the end of this manual provides a glossary. See the glossary to find the meaning of a
term.
Overview for each chapter
Notes before Using the System
For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your naviga-
tion system before using it. Be sure to read this chapter.
1
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immediately.
It will explain the basics of this system.
2
This section describes the basic operations for navigation.
How to Read Map Display
This section describes how to read the map screen, and the method of changing map view or
map scale.
3
4
5
6
7
Modifying Map Configurations
The behavior of your navigation system depends map display and guidance settings. If you
need to change any of current settings, read the relevant section of this chapter.
This section describes various ways to search for a destination, to edit the current route con-
ditions, and operate the route during route guidance.
Registering and Editing Locations
You can register and edit the points on the map. This chapter describes how to register a
home location, favorite location, or other location, and how to edit the registered location.
Using Traffic Information
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,
the system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic informa-
tion. This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on the map and
operation related traffic information.
Using XM Tuner and Other Information
When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation system,
variety of information other than traffic can be acquired. The navigation system can also reg-
ister emergency information. This chapter describes ways of the information acquired with
XM satellite radio, registration of emergency information.
8
Using Hands-free Phoning
When you are using a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology by connecting the Blue-
tooth unit (sold separately) to the navigation system, you can operate your cellular phone
hands-free. This chapter describes the operations related hands-free phoning.
9
Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions
The behavior of your navigation system depends on a number of general settings for naviga-
tion functions. If you need to change any of the initial settings (default settings), read the rel-
evant section of this chapter.
10
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
This section describes how to use DVD-Videos, CDs, MP3 discs and the radio.
11
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the AV Source (Music Library)
You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system. This chapter
describes recording music and playing back the recorded music.
12
13
14
15
Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when XM satellite radio
tuner or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner are connected.
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod, TV)
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when Pioneer audio
equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-CD player, iPod adapter, TV tuner) is connected.
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)
This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when an AV equipment
with RCA connector (AV input), future Pioneer devices (external unit ), and an auxiliary
equipment (AUX) are connected.
Customizing the Audio Setting Related with Audio Visual
Using the audio source, various audio-visual settings are available to suit your tastes. This
chapter describes how to change the settings.
16
17
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
This section describes navigation operations, such as searching the destination and per-
forming audio operations by voice.
Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and information such
as the availability of after-care. Please see “Display Information” at the end of this manual
to check the detail for each item on the menu.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminology
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in
this manual. They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment.
• Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
MAP button, MENU button.
• Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in Parenthesis [ ]
and bold:
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
• Extra information, alternative usages, and other notes are presented like this:
e.g.)
❒ Touch keys which are not available at this time are grayed out.
• The references have relations with that description are indicated like this:
e.g.)
The tab on the right corner indicates to which operation the description is related. Nav-
igation operation or AV (Audio Visual) source operation.
For example, “NAVI” indicates that the description is related to the operation for navi-
gation control.
“NAVI/AV” indicates that the description is related to both operation for navigation
control and AV control.
About the definition of terminology
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the
“Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi-
gation unit will be referred to as the “Rear Display”.
Video image
“Video image” in this manual indicates the moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in DVD drive or
from the equipment that is connected to this product with AV-BUS or RCA cable, such as a TV tuner or
general-purpose AV equipment.
Color difference of the map display between day and night
Night display
The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display. When driving at night, the colors
you see may differ from those shown.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-
fied or merged with other products. You shall not
alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-
etary legend contained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in the
Software, the related documentation and a copy
of this License Agreement to another party, pro-
vided that the party reads and agrees to accept
the terms and conditions of this License Agree-
ment.
License Agreement
PIONEER AVIC-Z1 - for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,
AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-
ICS (USA) INC. ([PIONEER]). PLEASE READ THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIO-
NEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND
BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE
SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED
BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER(S) ([SUPPLIERS]),
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS,
WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT
ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFT-
WARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN
FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS,
TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR
CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are pro-
vided to you [AS IS]. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-
SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively
referred to as [Pioneer]) MAKES AND YOU
RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR
THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-
SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is
complex and may contain some nonconformities,
defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that
the Software will meet your needs or expecta-
tions, that operation of the Software will be error
free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warranties
regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-
ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-
wise.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed on
the Pioneer products (the [Software]) and the
related documentation solely for your own per-
sonal use or for internal use by your business,
only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-
ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,
sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner
not expressly authorized by this agreement. You
shall not derive or attempt to derive the source
code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-
ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,
decompilation, or any other means. You shall not
use the Software to operate a service bureau or
for any other use involving the processing of data
for other persons or entities.
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY
YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-
PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,
LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR
COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY
BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-
AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-
NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD
OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary
ownership rights in the Software. The Software is
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-
UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR
INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S
LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE
ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.
6. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to those
customarily claimed by the United States govern-
ment, the Data is licensed with [Limited Rights.]
Utilization of the Software is subject to the
restrictions specified in the [Rights in Technical
Data] clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the
equivalent clause for non-defense agencies. Pio-
neer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East220th
Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.
7. MISCELLANEOUS
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-
tion of incidental or consequential damages, so
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to
you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-
bility shall not be applicable to the extent that
they are prohibited by any applicable federal,
state or local law which provides that such a dis-
claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-
empted.
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No change
in this Agreement shall be effective unless
agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers
do not have the authority to change this Agree-
ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and
construed in accordance with the internal laws of
the State of California. If any provision of this
Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,
the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall
remain in full force and effect.
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from Pio-
neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside the United States except as
authorized and as permitted by the laws and reg-
ulations of the United States. If the Software has
been rightfully obtained by you outside of the
United States, you agree that you will not re-
export the Software nor any other technical data
received from Pioneer, nor the direct product
thereof, except as permitted by the laws and reg-
ulations of the United States and the laws and
regulations of the jurisdiction in which you
obtained the Software.
5. TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You
may terminate it at any time by destroying the
Software. The Agreement also will terminate if
you do not comply with any terms or conditions of
this Agreement. Upon such termination, you
agree to destroy the Software.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fied or merged with other products. You shall not
alter or remove any copyright notice or propri-
etary legend contained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in the
Software, the related documentation and a copy
of this License Agreement to another party, pro-
vided that the party reads and agrees to accept
the terms and conditions of this License Agree-
ment.
PIONEER AVIC-Z1 - for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,
AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRON-
ICS OF CANADA, INC. ([PIONEER]). PLEASE
READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER
PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A
DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUP-
PLIER(S) ([SUPPLIERS]), AND YOUR USE OF
THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLI-
ERS’ SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are pro-
vided to you [AS IS]. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-
SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively
referred to as [Pioneer]) MAKES AND YOU
RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR
THE SOFTWARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLU-
SION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is
complex and may contain some nonconformities,
defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that
the Software will meet your needs or expecta-
tions, that operation of the Software will be error-
free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warranties
regarding the use or results of the use of the Soft-
ware in terms of its accuracy, reliability or other-
wise.
ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page
9). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PROD-
UCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF
RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHO-
RIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU
PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE
SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO
THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, nonex-
clusive license to use the software installed on
the Pioneer products (the [Software]) and the
related documentation solely for your own per-
sonal use or for internal use by your business,
only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-
ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,
sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner
not expressly authorized by this agreement. You
shall not derive, or attempt to derive, the source
code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-
ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,
decompilation, or any other means. You shall not
use the Software to operate a service bureau or
for any other use involving the processing of data
for other persons or entities.
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY
YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-
PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,
LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR
BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR
COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY
BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAM-
AGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIO-
NEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR
SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD
OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVID-
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary
ownership rights in the Software. The Software is
copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER
TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR
INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S
LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE
ENCLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.
6. MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No change
in this Agreement shall be effective unless
agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers
do not have the authority to change this Agree-
ment. This Agreement shall be governed by and
construed in accordance with the internal laws of
the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of
Canada applicable therein. If any provision of this
Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable,
the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall
remain in full force and effect.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limita-
tion of incidental or consequential damages, so
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to
you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of lia-
bility shall not be applicable to the extent that
they are prohibited by any applicable federal,
state or local law which provides that such a dis-
claimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-
empted.
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from Pio-
neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside Canada except as authorized
and as permitted by the laws and regulations of
Canada. If the Software has been rightfully
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree
that you will not re-export the Software nor any
other technical data received from Pioneer, nor
the direct product thereof, except as permitted by
the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws
and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you
obtained the Software.
5. TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You
may terminate it at any time by destroying the
Software. The Agreement also will terminate if
you do not comply with any terms or conditions of
this Agreement. Upon such termination, you
agree to destroy the Software.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLIERS DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE DATA
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT
THE OPERATION OF THE DATA WILL BE UNIN-
TERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO ORAL OR
WRITTEN ADVICE GIVEN BY TELE ATLAS, ITS
LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS OR ANY OF THEIR
RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES CREATES A WAR-
RANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASES TELE
ATLAS’, ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS LIABIL-
ITY AND YOU MAY NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH
INFORMATION OR ADVICE. THIS DISCLAIMER
IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THIS AGREE-
MENT AND YOU ACCEPT THE DATA ON THIS
BASIS.
Terms and Conditions for the
Tele Atlas Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE [AGREE-
MENT]) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. ([Tele
Atlas]). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
1. Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-
exclusive license to use the map data and busi-
ness points of interest information (the [POIs]),
(together, the [Data]) contained on hard disk
drive, solely for personal, non-commercial use
and not to operate a service bureau or for any
other use involving the processing of data of
other persons or entities. You may make one (1)
copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes
only but you may not otherwise copy, reproduce,
modify, make derivative works, derive the struc-
ture of or reverse engineer the Data. The Data
contains confidential and proprietary information
and materials, and may contain trade secrets, so
you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in
trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions
in any form, including by renting, leasing, pub-
lishing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the
Data to any third party. You are prohibited from
using the POIs (i) to create mailing lists or (ii) for
other such similar uses.
4. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT SHALL TELE ATLAS’, ITS LICEN-
SORS’ OR SUPPLIER’ AGGREGATE LIABILITY
FOR ALL MATTERS ARISING OUT OF THE SUB-
JECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR YOUR COPY OF
THE TELE ATLAS DATA. TELE ATLAS, ITS LICEN-
SORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
IN ANY MATTER TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS
OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUP-
TION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND
THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
DATA, EVEN IF TELE ATLAS, ITS LICENSORS OR
SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2. Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its
licensors and they retain all ownership rights in
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, obliter-
ate, or obscure any copyright notice or proprie-
tary legend contained in or on the Data.
5. Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately and
automatically, without notice, if you breach any
term of this Agreement. You agree that in the
event of termination of the Agreement, you shall
return the Data (including all documentation and
all copies) to Tele Atlas and its suppliers.
3. Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN [AS IS] AND
[WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS] AND TELE ATLAS, ITS
LICENSORS, AND ITS LICENSED DISTRIBUTORS
AND SUPPLIERS (COLLECTIVELY, [SUPPLIERS])
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRAN-
TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY,
EFFECTIVENESS, COMPLETENESS, ACCURACY,
TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE. TELE ATLAS, ITS LICENSORS AND SUP-
6. Indemnity.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (including
their respective licensors, suppliers, assignees,
subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the
respective officers, directors, employees, share-
holders, agents and representatives) free and
harmless from and against any liability, loss,
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
injury (including injuries resulting in death),
demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any
kind or character, including but not limited to
attorney’s fees, arising out of or in connection
with any use or possession by you of the Data.
RAL RESOURCES, TELE ATLAS OR ITS
LICENSORS AND EMPLOYEES CREATES A
WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASES HER
MAJESTY THE QUEEN AND THE MINISTER OF
NATURAL RESOURCES LIABILITY AND YOU
MAY NOT RELY ON ANY SUCH INFORMATION
OR ADVICE.
7. U.S. Government Rights.
If you are an agency, department, or other entity
of the United States Government, or funded in
whole or in part by the United States Govern-
ment, then use, duplication, reproduction,
release, modification, disclosure or transfer of
this commercial product and accompanying doc-
umentation, is restricted in accordance with FAR
12.212 and DFARS 227.7202, and by a license
agreement. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele
Atlas North America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street,
Lebanon, NH 03766, (603) 643-0330. The Data is
©1984-2003 by Tele Atlas N.V. and Tele Atlas
North America, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. For
purpose of any public disclosure provision under
any federal, state or local law, it is agreed that the
Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commer-
cial product and not subject to disclosure.
b. Disclaimer of Liability.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSORS,
INCLUDING HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN IN
RIGHT OF CANADA, THE MINISTER OF NATU-
RAL RESOURCES OR THEIR RESPECTIVE
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS (THE
[LICENSORS]), BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR MAT-
TERS ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER
OF THE AGREEMENTS, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE.
THE LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSE-
QUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSI-
NESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE
LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE AGREEMENT OR
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE DATA,
EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
8. Additional Provisions with respect to
Canadian Data only.
a. Warranty Disclaimer.
c. Indemnification by You.
The Data may include the data of licensors,
including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada. Such Data is provided on an [AS IS]
AND [WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS] and the licen-
sors, including HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN
AND THE MINISTER OF NATURAL
You shall indemnify and hold harmless the
licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in
Right of Canada, the Minister of Natural
Resources and their respective officers,
employees and agents, from and against any
claim, demand or action, irrespective of the
nature of the claim, demand or action alleging
loss, costs, damages, expenses, or injury
(including injury from death) resulting from
your authorized or unauthorized use, posses-
sion, modification, or alteration of the Data.
RESOURCES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGE-
MENT, MERCHANTABILITY, QUALITY, EFFEC-
TIVENESS, COMPLETENESS, ACCURACY,
TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA PROD-
UCT RESTS WITH YOU. HER MAJESTY THE
QUEEN AND THE MINISTER OF NATURAL
RESOURCES DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE
DATA WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE DATA WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO ORAL
OR WRITTEN ADVICE GIVEN BY HER MAJ-
ESTY THE QUEEN, THE MINISTER OF NATU-
9. Miscellaneous.
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its subject
matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a
joint venture, partnership or principal-agent rela-
tionship between Tele Atlas and you. The internal
laws of California shall govern this Agreement
and you consent to the jurisdiction of the North-
ern District of California or the State of California
for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2 - 4 and 7
- 11 shall survive the expiration or termination of
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this Agreement. This Agreement may be
About the Data for the Map
Database
amended, altered, or modified only by Tele Atlas.
You may not assign any part of this Agreement
without Tele Atlas’ prior written consent. You
acknowledge and understand that the Data may
be subject to restrictions on exportation and
agree to comply with any applicable export laws.
In the event that any provision or part of a provi-
sion of this Agreement is determined to be
invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provision
or part thereof shall be stricken from this Agree-
ment and the remainder of this Agreement shall
be valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum
extent possible. Any notice under this Agreement
shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North
America, Inc., Attention Contracts Department,
11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA.
• This database was developed and recorded up
to April 2005. Changes to streets/highways
made after that time may not be reflected in
this database.
• It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use
any part or the whole of this map in any form
without permission from the copyright owner.
• If the local traffic regulations or conditions
deviate from this data, follow the local traffic
regulations (such as signs, indications, etc.)
and conditions (such as construction, weather,
etc.).
• The traffic regulation data used in the map
database applies only to standard sized pas-
senger vehicles. Note that regulations for
larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-
standard vehicles are not included in the data-
base.
Copyright
©1984-2006 Tele Atlas North America, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Data by Info USA ©2006 All Rights Reserved.
Canadian Data © 2006 DMTI Spatial Inc., its licensors,
and Tele Atlas North America, Inc. Portions of Canadian
map data are reproduced under license from Her Maj-
esty the Queen in Right of Canada with permission from
Natural Resource Canada, The Queen in Right of Mani-
toba, and other third party suppliers.
© 2006 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telephone Number 55
Your Favorite Location 55
Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo-
ry and Address Book 56
Modifying the General Settings for
Navigation Functions
Phone 91
location 59
Location 96
Using XM Tuner and Other Informa-
tion
Other Information 73
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD
Drive and Radio)
Tuner 75
Checking the information registered as Emer-
gency Info 75
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®,
TV)
Using the AV Source (Music Li-
brary)
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT,
AUX)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing the Audio Setting re-
lated with Audio Visual
Factory Settings 175
Panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 178
Data 181
Errors 181
Operating Your Navigation System
with Voice
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Before Using the System
❒ Do not operate this navigation system (or the
rear view camera option if purchased) if doing
so will divert your attention in any way from
the safe operation of your vehicle. Always
observe safe driving rules and follow all exist-
ing traffic regulations. If you experience diffi-
culty in operating the system or reading the
display, park your vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake before making
the necessary adjustments.
Important Safety Information
Before using your navigation system, be sure to
read and fully understand the following safety
information:
• Do not attempt to install or service your
navigation system by yourself. Installation
or servicing of the navigation system by
persons without training and experience in
electronic equipment and automotive
accessories may be dangerous and could
expose you to the risk of electric shock or
other hazards.
❒ Never allow others to use the system unless
they have read and understood the operating
instructions.
❒ Never use this navigation system to route to
hospitals, police stations, or similar facilities
in an emergency. Stop using any functions
relating to the hands-free phone and please
call 911.
• When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route is automati-
cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-
lations, only information about traffic
regulations at the time when the route was
calculated is shown. One-way streets and
street closures may not be taken into con-
sideration. For example, if a street is open
during the morning only, but you arrive
later, it would be against the traffic regula-
tions so you cannot drive along the set
route. When driving, please follow the
actual traffic signs. Also, the system may
not know some traffic regulations.
❒ Route and guidance information displayed by
this equipment is for reference purposes only.
It may not accurately reflect the latest permis-
sible routes, road conditions, one way streets,
road closures, or traffic restrictions.
❒ Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in
force should always take precedence over
guidance given by the navigation system.
Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if
the navigation system provides contrary
advice.
❒ Read the entire manual before operating this
❒ Failure to set correct information about the
local time may result in the navigation system
providing improper routing and guidance
instructions.
navigation system.
❒ The navigation features of your navigation sys-
tem (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in
the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substi-
tute for your attentiveness, judgment, and
care when driving.
❒ Never set the volume of your navigation sys-
tem so high that you cannot hear outside traf-
fic and emergency vehicles.
❒ To promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the
parking brake is applied.
❒ The data encoded in the hard disk drive for the
navigation system is the intellectual property
of the provider, and the provider is responsible
for such content.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Keep this manual handy as a reference for
Additional Safety Information
To ensure safe driving
operating procedures and safety information.
❒ Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions carefully.
Parking brake interlock
❒ Do not install this navigation system where it
may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair
the performance of any of the vehicle’s operat-
ing systems or safety features, including air
bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the
driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle.
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD video
and certain touch key operation) offered by this
navigation system could be dangerous and/or
unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such
functions from being used while the vehicle is in
motion, there is an interlock system that senses
when the parking brake is set and when the vehi-
cle is moving. If you attempt to use the functions
described above while driving, they will become
disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and apply the parking brake. Please keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake.
❒ Please remember to wear your seat belt at all
times while operating your vehicle. If you are
ever in an accident, your injuries can be con-
siderably more severe if your seat belt is not
properly buckled.
❒ Never use headphones while driving.
• To avoid the risk of damage and injury and
the potential violation of applicable laws,
the navigation system is not for use with a
“Video image” that is visible to the driver.
• In some countries or states the viewing of
“Video image” on a display inside a vehi-
cle even by persons other than the driver
may be illegal. Where such regulations
apply, they must be obeyed.
• When applying the parking brake in order
to view “Video image” or to enable other
functions offered by the navigation sys-
tem, park your vehicle in a safe place, and
keep the brake pedal pushed down before
releasing the parking brake if the vehicle
is parked on a hill or otherwise might
move when releasing the parking brake.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features (Characteristics of this
software)
• Accuracy/performance of interlock may be
impacted by such factors as GPS signal
detection, speed pulse wire connectivity,
and driving habits or conditions of the
place where the vehicle is parked.
• It is strongly suggested that the speed
pulse wire be connected for accuracy of
navigation and better performance of
interlock.
Touch panel key operation
It is possible to operate the navigation function
and the Audio function by using touch panel key.
Variety of View Modes
Various types of screen display can be selected
for navigation guidance.
– [Map Mode], [Mixed Mode], [Route View],
[Driver’s View], and [Twin Map View]
The split screen mode is also available.
– [Rear View] (Rear view camera screen and Nav-
igation map screen)
• If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for
some reason, it is recommended that the
pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately)
be used.
– [Vehicle Dynamics]
When you attempt to watch “Video image”s while
driving, the warning “Viewing of front seat
video source while driving is strictly prohib-
ited.” will appear on the screen. To watch “Video
image”s on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and apply the parking brake. Please keep
the brake pedal pushed down before releasing
the parking brake.
You can also display information on vehicle
speed, acceleration, and voltage, etc.
• The rear view mode is to use the naviga-
tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the
trailers, or while backing up. Do not use
this function for entertainment purposes.
About rear view camera and [Rear
View] mode
With an optional rear view camera, you are able
to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an
eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking
spot.
Wide Variety of Facility Information for
Points of Interest (POI) Search
You can search your destination from all areas.
– Approximately 11 million POIs are included in
this database as of January 2005.
– Some POI information may not be accurate or
may become inaccurate through the passage of
time. Please directly contact the POI to verify the
accuracy of the information about the POI which
appears in this database. POI information is sub-
ject to change without notice.
• SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR
REVERSED.
• USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR
MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.
OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY
OR DAMAGE.
Auto Reroute Function
If you deviate from the set route, the system will
re-calculate the route from that point so that you
remain on track to the destination.
❒ This function may not work in certain areas.
Auto CD title and MP3 file listing
Title lists will automatically be displayed when a
CD TEXT or MP3 disc is played. This system pro-
vides easy-to-operate audio functions that allow
playback simply by selecting an item from the
list.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the
Data communication function with XM
tuner
accuracy of the information transmitted.
If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-
P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can use
traffic information as a part of the navigation
function. Separate subscription for XM NavTraffic
required.
❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided by
XM, such as cancellation of the services or
subscription update.
❒ Traffic information is not taken into account
when calculating estimated time of arrival
time or travel time for your destination.
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-
vices, you can utilize the XM display which fea-
tures station logos and category icons, improving
your XM Audio experience.
Notes for Hard disk drive
Recording equipment and copy-
right
❒ The icon of each broadcast station is con-
tained in the hard disk drive based on the data
provided by XM Satellite Radio as of Decem-
ber 2005.
Recording equipment should be used only for
lawful copying and you are advised to check care-
fully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-
right material such as films or music is unlawful
unless permitted by a legal exception or con-
sented to by the right owners.
Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in
the lineup or icon of the broadcast station in
the future may not be supported by the navi-
gation system, and may cause the unit not to
display the correct icons.
About writing data to the hard
disk drive at low temperature
About XM NavTraffic Service
and Pioneer Navigation
Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording
music to the music library may be disabled when
the navigation system detects abnormally low
temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will
become available once the temperature inside
the vehicle returns to normal.
❒ XM NavTraffic subscription is required and is
available only in select markets. Check
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availability,
pricing information, and other details. The
availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on
the ability of the antenna to receive a signal.
The signal may be unavailable if obstructed
(e.g., by buildings, mountains, trees, bridges,
bad weather, etc.). XM NavTraffic data also
may be unavailable or not current if the origi-
nal data source is not providing data (e.g.,
scheduled or unscheduled downtime) or has
not been updated itself or if there is a time lag
between the time the original data source is
updated and when you receive the updated
XM NavTraffic data.
When recording please pay
attention to these points;
• Pioneer does not compensate for the contents
that could not be recorded or any loss of
recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of
the navigation system.
• The data recorded on the navigation system is
not allowed to be used without a permission
from its right holder under copyright law
except for personal entertainment.
❒ Depending on the amount of data being trans-
mitted in your area, it may take several min-
utes to display all of the available data.
• Make sure to check the recording operation
before recording and check the recorded con-
tents after recording.
❒ The information content depends on the infor-
mation provided by XM NavTraffic Service,
including data refresh and availability timing.
• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the data saved or
recorded by the customer
Product registration
Visit us at the following site:
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-
tion system by the customer cannot be
extracted from the navigation system, and
those service cannot be accepted.
1. Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to this
information in the event of an insurance claim
such as loss or theft.
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-
tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-
teed during repair or service. Lost data that
was saved or recorded by the customer is not
guaranteed.
• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded
into the Music Library cannot be backed up
during repair or service.
2. Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
3. Download owner’s manuals, order product cat-
alogues, research new products, and much
more.
4. Receive notices of software upgrades and soft-
ware updates.
Failure to operate
Should the navigation system fail to operate prop-
erly, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized
Pioneer service facility.
After-sales service for Pioneer
products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
which you purchased the product for after-sales
service (including warranty conditions) or any
other information. In case the necessary infor-
mation is not available, please contact the com-
panies listed below.
Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair with-
out making advance contact.
CANADA
U.S.A
cs of
Pioneer Electroni
Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER
Pioneer Electronics
(USA) Inc.
-
CUSTOMER SUP
PORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760
Long Beach, CA
90801-1760
SATISFACTION
DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway
o
Markham, Ontari
L3R OP2
800-421-1404
1-877-283-5901
For warranty information, please see the Limited
Warranty sheet included with your product.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Basic Operation
4 Assign a destination by using the touch
panel key and beginning route guidance,
or operate the Audio source.
Flow from Startup to Termina-
tion
At first, please confirm the positions of the follow-
ing features using the “Hardware Manual”.
• MAP button
• MENU button
• AV button
• OPEN CLOSE button
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After some time, the navigation opening
screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a
message screen is displayed.
❒ Touch keys which are not available at this
time are grayed out.
➲ Specifying the address and searching the
Page 43
2 Check the details of the cautionary mes-
sage and touch [OK].
You can operate the navigation system by
touching keys displayed on the screen.
The map of your surroundings is displayed.
If the route is already set, the screen changes
to route guidance mode.
5 Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate
the system.
This navigation system is also turned off.
❒ Until your vehicle reach the vicinity of the
destination, the set route will not be
deleted even if the engine is turned off.
When you use the navigation system for the first
time, [Regional Settings] screen appears. On
[Regional Settings] screen, you can change the
language or time. (The settings can also be
changed afterward.)
Page 37
❒ To protect the LCD screen from damage,
be sure to touch the touch keys with a fin-
ger. (The stylus is supplied for special cali-
brations. Do not use the stylus for normal
operations.)
3 Press the MENU button.
Displays the navigation menu.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Information] menu
How to Use Navigation Menu
Screens
The basic operation of the navigation is per-
formed by using menus.
The navigation menu is divided into four: [Desti-
nation], [Information], [Map], and [Settings].
Use this menu to check traffic information using
the GEX-P10XMT*1
Displaying Navigation menu
.
If you are using the cellular phone featuring Blue-
tooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth
unit (ND-BT1)*2 to the navigation system, you can
configure Bluetooth settings or check the outgo-
ing/incoming call history. Also use to register
information for emergencies.
1 Press the MENU button.
2 To change to the menu you want to use,
touch the name of the menu displayed at
the top of the screen.
3 If you want to return to the map, press the
MAP button.
❒ [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-
fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Browse], and [My
Favorites] can be active only when the GEX-
P10XMT*1 is connected to the navigation sys-
tem.
Navigation menu overview
[Destination] menu
❒ [Phone Menu] can be active only when the
Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 is connected to the
navigation system.
GEX-P10XMT*1:
XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver (sold
separately). Traffic information only available for
cities where information is provided by XM
NavTraffic service. Active subscription to XM
NavTraffic required to receive traffic information
on the navigation system.
Also you can check your route, and the set route
can be canceled from this menu.
➲ Specifying the address and searching for the
Page 78
ND-BT1*2:
Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoning and
business card transfer via Bluetooth technology.
And business card transfer via Bluetooth technol-
ogy.
[Map] menu
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can change the [View Mode], or set the
items to be displayed during the navigation func-
tion.
Basic Navigation
❒ [View Mode] can be selected only when the
vehicle position is at the current position. If
you want to select [View Mode] while scroll-
ing the map, press the MAP button to locate
the vehicle position back to the current posi-
tion.
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these basic navigation functions while
your vehicle is in motion. To enable these
functions, you must stop in a safe place
and apply the parking brake (see page 18
Interlock for details).
Settings menu
Basic flow of operation
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake.
2 Press the MENU button to display the
navigation menu.
Customize the navigation functions so they can
be used easily.
3 Select the method of searching for your
destination.
Buttons you can use
The availability of a specific button or function is
indicated by its color. Depending on the status of
your vehicle, some buttons will be available, while
others will not be.
4 Enter the information about your desti-
nation to calculate route.
5 Confirm the location at the map.
Light gray touch key: The button is operable.
6 Checking and fixing the route.
7 Your navigation system sets the route to
your destination, and the map of your
surroundings appears.
Dark gray touch key: The function is not available
(e.g., operation is prohibited while driving).
8 After releasing the parking brake, drive
in accordance with the navigation infor-
mation, subject to the important safety
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Input the house number and touch [OK].
Touch the characters you want to input.
❒ Also input a prefix to the house number.
❒ Touching [OK] with no input allows you to
specify and search for a street name or the
name of the city or area first.
How to calculate your destina-
tion by using Address Search
The most frequently used function is [Address
Search], in which the address is specified and
the destination is searched. This section
describes how to use [Address Search] and the
basics of using the navigation system.
6 Input the street name.
When the options are narrowed down to six or
less, a list of the matched streets automati-
cally appears.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
navigation menu.
When you enter the same characters as those
entered previously, the system automatically
displays the character that follows the entered
characters. (Auto fill-in function.)
2 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu.
3 Touch [Address Search].
Select the method for searching the destina-
tion.
❒ For example, You can just enter part of the
name, such as [California] for [Early Cali-
fornia ct].
❒ When entering the characters, the unit will
automatically search the database of all
possible options. If there is only one letter
that could possibly follow your entry, that
letter will automatically be entered.
❒ A list appears if multiple options exist.
Select the desired one from the list, and
proceed to the next step. In rare cases, you
need to input the city name to determine
the city.
4
Touch [State code key] to select the state,
province, or territory.
If the destination is in another state, this
changes the state setting.
❒ Once the state has been selected, you only
have to change states when your destina-
tion is outside of the state you selected.
State code key
Selected state
:
The input text is deleted one letter at a time
from the end of the text. Continuing to touch
deletes all of the text.
[Back]:
Returns you to the previous screen.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation of state selection screen
(6) [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
(1)
(7)
:
The input text is deleted one letter at a time
from the end of the text. Continuing to touch
deletes all of the text.
(8) [City]:
Touch if you want to specify the destination
city or area first. (This is available only when
(4) is blank.)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) [A-C] to [U-Z] :
(9) [Sym.]:
Use to jump to the first state, province, or ter-
ritory which state with that alphabet.
You can input text with marks such as [&] or
[+].
(2)
:
(10) [0-9]:
Use to see the next page or previous page of
the list.
You can input text with numbers.
[Center]:
(3) State list:
This can be selected when you enter a city or
area name first. Touch this button to display
the central point of the entered city or area.
Touching [OK] searches the route to the cen-
tral point. Proceed to Step 9.
Pressing one of these items, set that as
search area.
(4) [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
❒ You can customize the keyboard type to be
Operation of street name or city name
input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)
displayed on the screen.
(8)
(4)
(7)
Page 92
(11) Street:
Touch if you want to return the street input
mode. (This is available only when (8) is
blank.)
(5)
(2)
(10) (9)
(1) (3) (6)
Auto fill-in function
(1) State code key :
Jump to the state selection screen. (Selected
state code is displayed.)
(2) [OK] :
Confirms the characters displayed in (4), and
proceeds to the next step.
(3) [List] :
The previously entered characters are stored for
each state. The next time a character is entered,
suggested character will be shown. For example, if
Lists candidates based on yellow characters
in (4). Touch the desired item in the list to pro-
ceed to the next step.
[
E 220TH ST
]
has been entered in the past, when
E 220TH ST will be fill-in
you input a letter just
[
E
]
,
[
]
(4) Text box:
automatically. The manually input characters are
displayed in yellow, and the suggested characters
are displayed in white, so you can distinguish them.
To determine the filled-in character, touch [OK].
Displays the characters that are entered.
(5) Keyboard:
Use to enter the text.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Touch the street from the list.
9 Touch [OK] after checking the location.
“Location confirmation screen”
If the selected street has only one matching
location, the destination display screen
appears. Proceed to Step 9.
Route calculation starts.
8 Touch the city or area where your destina-
tion is located.
When the route calculation is completed,
“Route Confirmation screen” appears.
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
❒ If there is no matching location, the navi-
gation system displays [The address
does not exit. Do you want to continue
?]. When you touch [Yes], a place near the
specified location appears. In this case,
pay attention to the displayed location may
not be suitable for your intention. If you
want to try again, touch [No] to return to
the previous screen.
❒ If you did not input the house number in
Step 5, the house number input screen
appear after this step. You should input the
house number now (perform Step 5).
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To check the location at the map
Operation of street list screen
“Location confirmation screen”
(4)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Calculating the route to the destination
Route calculation starts. When the route cal-
culation is completed, “Route Confirmation
screen” appears.
(2)
(5)
(1) Number of possible choices
(2)
:
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls you
through the list and allows you to view the
remaining items.
❒ If you press the MAP button or MENU
button during route calculation, the calcu-
lation is canceled and the map screen
appears.
(3)
:
If the character that cannot be displayed
within the displayed area, touching
right of the item allows you to see remained
characters.
to the
(2) Scrolling the map
The map display changes to the scroll mode.
The scroll mode can fine-adjust the location,
and then you can set the location as your des-
tination or do various operation by using the
shortcut menu.
(4)
:
Touching
displays a map of the place you
have selected. (Possibilities for place names
may appear with the list screen.) You can also
set a destination by touching
to the right
of the list. Touching [OK] set the location
pointed by the scroll cursor as your destina-
tion.
(3) Setting the location as waypoint
The location indicated by the scroll cursor will
be set as a waypoint.
(5) [Back] :
Returns previous screen.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10Touch [OK] to decide your route.
❒
may be displayed with the calculated
route even if [Avoid Freeway] is [On]. That
means the reference route if you use the free-
way.
(2) Distance to the destination
(3) Travel time to destination
(4) Fixes the displayed route
Fixes the displayed route, and starts the route
guidance.
Checking and fixing the route
You can check the route details. You can also
recalculate the route in different conditions.
Route Confirmation screen
(5) Displaying multiple routes
You can select a desired route from multiple
route options. Calculated routes are shown in dif-
ferent colors.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
There can be cases that the same route is dis-
played even when multiple routes are searched.
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) Route calculation condition
Shows the route has been calculated under those
conditions.
Touching
to
switch to another
•
•
•
shows that fast route is prioritized.
shows that short route is prioritized.
route. Touching [OK] returns to the previous dis-
play.
If you set waypoints, you cannot use multiple
route option.
shows that using the highway and main
road are is prioritized.
(6) Changing the route calculation condition
Modify each calculation condition, and recalcu-
late the route.
•
•
•
•
shows that use or disuse of freeway.
shows that use or disuse of toll road.
shows that use or disuse of ferry.
➲ Refer to after Step 3 of “Modifying the route
(7) View the route
shows that use or disuse of learning
route.
In addition, if the calculated route have uni-
You can check the streets which you will go
through the destination.
➲ Refer to “Checking the route by text” ➞
tended results, the following icons will be shown.
Page 33
•
•
•
shows that the route use freeway against
the setting [Avoid Freeway] is [On].
shows that the route use toll road against
the setting [Avoid Toll Road] is [On].
shows that the route use ferry against the
setting [Avoid Ferry] is [On].
(8) Checking the shape of route
You can check overall shape of your route and the
location of destination on the map.
➲ Refer to after the Step 2 of “Checking the
(9) Adding and editing the waypoint
You can add/remove or sort waypoints.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the route guidance starts
Canceling the Route Guidance
Touching [OK] in “Route Confirmation screen”
starts the route guidance on the displayed route.
Your navigation system gives you the following
information with the timing adjusted to the speed
of your vehicle:
If you no longer need to travel to your destination
or if you want to change your destination, follow
the steps below to cancel the route guidance.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Cancel Route].
The message confirming whether to cancel
the current route appears.
• Distance to the next turning point
• Direction of travel
• Road number of the freeway
• Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)
• Arrival of your destination
2 Touch [Yes].
❒
Touching
or
allows you to turn the
voice guidance on or off.
❒ Touching allows you to hear the
information again.
❒ If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant dur-
ing the route guidance, your navigation sys-
tem remembers your destination and route
Information. When you start the engine and
get back on the road, the route guidance
resumes.
The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
On this screen, you can also select the follow-
ing items:
Skip :
❒ If you deviate from the route with guidance set
to [Route View] or [Guide Mode] and enter
a street not recorded on the hard disk drive,
the screen changes to [Map Mode]. When
you return to the route, returns to the original
view and resumes route guidance.
Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and
the route is recalculated. (The skipped way-
point will not be deleted.)
No :
Returns to the previous display without delet-
ing the route.
Basic items on the guidance
This section describes only the basic items that
are displayed on the Map Mode screen.
(2) (3)
(1)
(4)
(1) Current location
(2) Distance to the destination
(3) Estimated time of arrival (default)
(4) ON/OFF key of voice guidance
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determine which condition takes priority for
route calculation.
Modifying the Route Calculation
Conditions
You can modify the conditions for route calcula-
tion and recalculate the current route.
[Fast]*:
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to
your destination as a priority.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.
[Short]:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
your destination as a priority.
2 Touch [Options].
[Main Road]:
Calculate a route that passes major arterial road
as a priority.
Avoid Toll Road
This setting controls whether toll roads (including
toll areas) should be taken into account.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including
toll areas).
3 Touch the desired items to change the
route calculation conditions and then
touch [OK].
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
❒ The system may calculate a route that
includes toll road even if [On] is selected.
Avoid Ferry
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
should be taken into account.
When a single route is calculated, the system
searches the route that meets these condi-
tions as much as possible.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.
❒ A single route is calculated in the following
cases:
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
— When a waypoint is set
— When a route is set through voice recogni-
tion
❒ The system may calculate a route that
— When auto reroute is carried out
includes freeway even if [On] is selected.
Avoid Freeway
This setting controls whether freeways may be
Items that users can operate
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that
they are default or factory settings.
included in the route calculation.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.
Route Condition
This setting controls which the route should be
calculated by taking into account the time or the
distance or the main road.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include freeways.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The system may calculate a route that
3 Touch or to scroll the list.
Scroll the list as necessary.
includes freeway even if [On] is selected.
Names of the streets you are driving through
Learning Route
The system learns the travel history of each road
and directional tendency.
This setting controls whether or not the travel his-
tory should be taken into account.
[On]*:
Calculate the route with the travel history taken
into account.
Turning direction
Driving distance
[Off]*:
Calculate the route without the travel history
taken into account.
4 Touch [Back].
You can return to the previous display.
❒ When a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining
roads will be shown in the list as you drive
on.)
[Clear]:
Clear the current travel history.
Checking the Current Route
Checking the entire route over-
view at the map
You can check information about the route
between your current location and your destina-
tion.
You can check the entire shape of the current route.
You can select two methods:
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
Route confirmation screen appears.
❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.
• Checking the passing streets with a list.
• Checking the route by scrolling the map along
the route.
Checking the route by text
You can check the route details.
2 Touch [Detail].
❒ This function is not available if your vehicle
has deviated from the route.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
Route confirmation screen appears.
❒ [Route Overview] is displayed only when
the route is set.
2 Touch [Profile].
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch the screen and place the scroll cur-
sor on the point whose detail or entire pic-
ture you want to view. Or zoom in or zoom
out the map scale.
Editing Waypoints
You can select waypoints (locations you want to
visit on the way to your destination) and you can
recalculate the route to pass through these loca-
tions.
Adding a waypoint
Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and selected
points can be sorted automatically or manually.
The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in
or out so you can view the detail or the entire
picture.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
2 Touch [Waypoints].
4 Touch [Back].
The waypoint menu screen appears.
You can return to the previous display.
❒ You can also check the overview by using
the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-
view] is selected on the [Short-Cut
Selection].
3 Touch [Add].
Switch the display to search for points. After
searching for a point, display it on a map, then
touch [OK] to add to the waypoints. (You can
add up to five waypoints in total.)
4 Touch [OK].
A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-
tion screen” appears.
❒ If you set a waypoint(s) in the route to your
destination, the route up to the next way-
point will appear light green. The rest of
the route will be light in blue.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual:
Deleting a waypoint
You can manually sort destination and way-
points. Touch the destination and waypoints
on the left side of the screen in the order you
want to visit. The touched destination and
waypoints are displayed on the right side of
the screen.
You can delete waypoints from the route and then
recalculate the route. (You can delete waypoints
successively.)
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
2 Touch [Waypoints].
The waypoint menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete], then touch the waypoint
you want to delete.
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the
list.
4 Touch [OK].
4 Touch [OK].
The route is calculated again, and “Route con-
firmation screen” appears.
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
Skipping a waypoint
Sorting waypoints
If the points are set, the next waypoint along the
route can be skipped.
You can sort waypoints, and recalculate the
route.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].
menu, and then touch [Route Overview].
2 Touch [Skip].
2 Touch [Waypoints].
A new route to your destination through all
remaining waypoints, except for the skipped
waypoint, is calculated.
The waypoint menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or
[Manual].
The “Route confirmation screen” appears.
Automatic:
You can sort the destination and waypoints
automatically. The system will show the near-
est waypoint (distance in a straight line) from
the current location as waypoint 1, and sort
the other points (including your destination)
in order of distance from your current loca-
tion.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
How to Read Map Display
How to Use the Map
How to view the map of the cur-
rent location
Most of the information provided by your naviga-
tion system can be seen on the map. You need to
get to know how the information appears on the
map.
❒ This example shows the case where [Second
Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].
Map View
Displays standard map.
Switching the view mode
(1)
(10)
(20)
There are five types of map display and two addi-
tional view modes.
(9)
(16)
(2)
• Map Mode
• Driver’s View
• Twin Map View
(5)
(3)
(6)
(11)
• Guide Mode (during route guidance only)
• Route View (during route guidance only)
• Vehicle Dynamics
(8)
(4)
(12) (21)
(7)
• Rear View (Only possible when the [Camera
Input] is set to [On].)
Guide View
1 Press the MAP button to display a map of
The standard map of your surroundings is over-
laid with the name of the street you will turn onto
next, and 2 arrows: the larger one on the left indi-
cating the direction of your next maneuver and
how far you are from approaching it, and the
smaller one on the right indicating the direction
of your second to next maneuver and how far you
are from approaching it.
the area around your current position.
2 Press the MAP button again.
3 Touch the mode name or press the MAP
button to select the mode you want to dis-
play.
(1)
(10)
(20)
(2)
(9)
(16)
(5)
(15)
(22)
(3)
(6)
(11)
❒ You can display the view mode screen by
touching [Map] in the navigation menu,
and touching [View Mode].
(8)
(4)
(12)(21)
(7)
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Route View
Vehicle Dynamics Display
Indicates the status of your vehicle.
Displays the name of the street you will next
travel along and an arrow indicating the direction
of travel.
(1)
(10)
(20)
• In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode,
the speedometer display may show a dif-
ferent speed than your vehicle’s actual
speedometer, because your unit measures
speed in a different way.
(2)
(9)
(13)
(5)
(15)
(3)
(6)
(11)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(21)
Driver’s View
The map from the driver’s viewpoint is shown.
(1)
(10)
(20)
❒ You can change the items indicated on the left
and right meters.
(2)
(9)
(13)
(15)
(22)
(3)
Page 78
(5)
(6)
(11)
Rear View
(7)
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-
roundings is indicated on the right.
(8)
(4)
(21)
(2)
(10)
(20)
About the 3D POI
The specified POI appears in 3D. (Only the POI
(9)
sign may appear if there is not a 3D data.)
(15)
(22)
(13)
(5)
❒ The displayed 3D POI or POI sign in the left
screen is not related [Overlay POI].
(6)
Twin Map View
(8)
(21)
(7)
You can split the screen vertically in half. The
right screen and the left screen can display a
map in different scales. If you set [Twin View
2D/3D] to [3D], a 3D map appears on the left
screen.
❒ If the [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear
view image is not displayed. Please set it to
[On].
(1)
(10)
(20)
❒ When using a camera set to turn On/Off in
conjunction with the reverse signal, no cam-
era images will be displayed in rear view mode
while you are moving forward.
(2)
(9)
(13)
(15)
(22)
(6)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(11)
❒ If the camera is set always On, it can display
images in rear view mode when the vehicle is
moving forward. In that case, you should ask
the camera maker or dealer whether the cam-
era’s functions or lifetime would be affected.
(7)
(4)
(7) (21)
(8)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please beware that in this setting,
camera image is not resized to fit to screen,
and that a portion of camera image may not
be viewable.
(18)
(19)
Enlarged map of the intersection
This screen is displayed only when [Close Up
View] in the [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].
❒ If the data for these items are not contained in
the hard disk drive, the information is not
available even if there are the signboards on
the actual road.
Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)
City Map
(13)
When [City Map] in the [Map] menu is [On], in
certain metropolitan city areas, a more detailed
[City Map] is available at the 0.05 mi (50m) map
scale or lower. (The screen changes automati-
cally when you enter certain metropolitan city
area.)
(14)
(23)
(1)
(10)
(20)
Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(11)
(8)
(4)
(21)
(7)
Display during freeway driving
In certain locations of the freeway, lane informa-
tion is available, indicating the recommended
lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid-
ance.
❒ The detailed city map may not appear for the
following reasons:
• The data for that city area is not contained
in the hard disk drive.
• When you are driving on a freeway.
(17)
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit num-
bers and freeway signs may be displayed when in
the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
greater than 25 mi (50 km), it is fixed to [north
up].
Display items
❒ Information with the mark (*) appears only
Heading up:
when the route is set.
The map display always shows the vehicle’s
direction as proceeding toward the top of the
screen.
❒ Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
North up:
Current location
The map display always has north at the top of
the screen.
The current location of your vehicle. The tip of the
triangular mark indicates your heading and the
display moves automatically as you drive.
(6) Zoom in/Zoom out
Touch to change the map’s scale.
❒ The center of the triangular mark is the cur-
rent vehicle position.
(7) Map scale
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.
Destination*
The checker-flag indicates your destination.
(8) VOICE icon
Touch to change to the voice recognition mode.
Guidance point*
The next guidance point (next turning point, etc.)
is shown by a yellow flag.
❒ This is displayed only when the microphone
for voice recognition is connected.
The guidance points of up to three point ahead
including the waypoint are displayed.
➲ The voice operation of the navigation system
(9) Traffic status
This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner
waypoint
The checker-flag and number (1 to 5) indicates
your waypoint.
(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connected, and
traffic information is received.
(1) Name of the next street to be used*
(2) Distance to the guidance point*
TRFC — No problem.
ANTENNA — Improper antenna connection.
UPDATING — Updating encryption code.
Touching
allows you to hear the infor-
mation again.
(3) Distance to the destination (or distance to
waypoint)*
The distance on this button shows the distance to
(10) Current time
(11) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time
to your destination)*
The display alternates by pressing it.
the destination or to each waypoint. If waypoints
are set, the distance to the destination and the
next waypoint chage with each touch.
The estimated time of arrival is automatically cal-
culated from the Average Speed set and the
actual average speed.
❒ When the vehicle position is on the route, the
distance to the destination (or waypoint)
appears. When the vehicle position is not on
the route, the linear distance to the destina-
tion (or waypoint) appears.
❒ The estimated time of arrival is a guideline
and may not correspond to the actual time of
arrival.
(4) Name of the street your vehicle is travel-
ing along (or City Name, etc.)
(12) Tracking dot
The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has
(5) Compass
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is less
traveled by white dots.
than 25 mi (50 km), touching the map changes
the direction that it is displayed in (north up/
heading up). When the scale of the map is
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) Map of your surroundings (Side map)
Touching on the map briefly shows the shortcut
(21) Mute Voice Guidance icon
Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice
menu, while touching longer changes the map to
the Scroll mode.
Guidance. You can select between display and
non-display.
➲ Moving the map to the location you want to
➲ Selecting display or non-display for the Mute
(14) Distance to an intersection*
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map. The
(22) Second Maneuver Arrow
The turing direction two corners ahead appears.
green bar gets shorter as your vehicle
approaches an intersection.
You can select between display and non-display.
➲ Selecting display or non-display for the Sec-
(15) Next direction of travel*
When you approach an intersection, it appears
(23) POI icon
The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of
green. The screen displays the distance to the
next guidance point, and the next guidance point
after that.
the intersection (when available data exists.).
(16) Direction line*
The direction towards the location set in (4) is
Changing the scale of the map
Touching the [Zoom in/Zoom out] key displayed
on the upper right of the screen displays the
scale gauge. (When the view mode is set to Map
Mode or Guide Mode, the [Direct scale] key is
displayed.) Directly touching the [Direct scale]
key changes the map to the selected scale.)
indicated with a straight line.
(17) Lane information*
Lane information is displayed the first time there
is a voice guidance on your route. The indications
with white arrow on the green plate is the most
reccomended lane. If the next traveling direction
screen is displayed when you approach a inter-
change, junction or exit, the lane information dis-
appears.
Touching
or
above the scale gauge allows
you to specify the scale in greater detail within a
range of 25 yards to 1 000 miles (25 meters to
2 000 kilometers).
(18) Freeway signs*
These show the road number and give directional
information.
(19) Freeway exit information*
Displays the freeway exit.
(20) Bluetooth Connected icon
This icon is displayed when the cellular phone
Direct scale key
featuring Bluetooth technology is connected cor-
rectly. You can select between display and non-
display.
❒ The icon of a registered location and the traf-
fic information icons are displayed when the
map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or lower.
: Connected
❒ Traffic line is displayed when the map scal is 1
mile (2 km) or lower.
: Disconnected
❒ POI icons are displayed when the map scale is
❒ This is available only when the Bluetooth unit
0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.
(sold separately) is connected.
➲ Selecting display or non-display for the Blue-
Scroll the map to the location
you want to see
Touching anywhere on the map changes the map
to “Scroll mode” and the map begins scrolling in
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the direction you touched. The scrolling stops
when you release your finger from the screen.
Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map
of your surroundings.
Viewing the information of a specified
location
An icon appears at registered places (home loca-
tion, specific places, address book entries) and
places where there is a POI icon or traffic infor-
mation icon. Place the scroll cursor over the icon
to view the detailed information.
This is the line connecting between the current
location and scroll cursor.
❒ Touch the area close to the center of the
screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides of
the screen to scroll through quickly.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor
to the icon you want to view.
❒ During [Twin Map View], the map on the left
hand side cannot be scrolled. Touch the map
on the right hand side to scroll the maps.
2 Touch
.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(5)
Information for a specified location appears.
(4)
(1) Scroll cursor
The position of scroll cursor shows the location
selected on the current map.
The information shown varies according to
the location. (There may be no information for
that location.)
❒ When the scale is 0.25 mi (200 m) or lower,
the road appears light blue in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
➲ Displaying facilities (POI) icon on the map
(2) Direction line
This is the line connecting between the current
location and scroll cursor.
❒ [Dial] becomes active when the Bluetooth
unit (sold separately) is connected to the
navigation system together with the cellu-
lar phone. By touching [Dial], you can
make a phone call to the displayed phone
number.
The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-
cated with a straight line.
(3) Distance from the current location
This shows the distance in a straight line
between the location indicated by the scroll cur-
sor and your current location.
(4) The street name, city name, area name
and other information for this location.
(The information displayed varies according to
3 Touch [Back].
the scale.)
You can return to the previous display.
Touching
on the right displays hidden text.
4 Touch
.
➲ Displaying information on the specified loca-
You can return to the map of your surround-
ings.
(5) Current location key
❒ You can also return to the map of your sur-
roundings by pressing the MAP button.
Touching
returns you to the map of your cur-
rent location.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Touching [Registration] and selecting
[OK] allow you to register the location to
Address Book.
Shortcut menu
Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,
such as route calculation for the location indi-
cated by the scroll cursor, or registering a loca-
tion in [Address Book], faster than using the
navigation menu.
Page 61
: Vicinity Search
You can customize the shortcuts displayed
onscreen. The shortcuts described here are pre-
pared as default setting.
You select a location with the scroll cursor.
Nearby POIs (Points Of Interest) will also be
found.
➲ Searching for the facilities surrounding a
❒ When the Bluetooth unit (Sold separately) is
connected to the navigation system, you can
display shortcuts related to phone functions.
: Overlay POI
You can select the icon of the facilities to be
displayed on the map.
❒ Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
removed from the shortcut menu.
Page 47
1 When the map is displayed, touch
.
: Volume
On the Volume Settings screen, you can
adjust the guidance volume or the cellular
phone volume.
Shortcut menu
: BT telephone Book
You can display the telephone book trans-
ferred to the navigation system.
: Route Options*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This
item can be selected only during route guid-
ance.
: Menu Close
You can add changes to your route and check
it.
Hides the shortcut menu.
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-
sor.
Page 29
: Registration
Registers the location indicated by the scroll
cursor to Address Book.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Modifying Map Configurations
Close Up View
You can select the method to display the close
• For safety reasons, these functions are not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and put on the parking
brake before setting your route (see page
18 Interlock for details).
up view of the intersection.
2D*:
Displays the close up view with the 2D map.
3D:
Displays the close up view with [Driver’s
View].
Off:
Do not display the close up view.
Entering the Map Menu
City Map
You can select whether to display or not the
city map when in certain metropolitan city
areas.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
navigation menu.
2 Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.
On*:
Automatically switches to the city map when
in a city map area.
3 Change the setting.
❒ This section describes the details of the
setting for each item. Settings marked with
an asterisk (*) show that they are default or
factory settings.
Off:
Do not show the city map.
❒ Even if you switch [City Map] to [On], city
map cannot display in the area where
there is no city map data.
Tracking Display
Setting the Item on the Map
Screen
You can display the trace of your passing with
white dots on the route.
You can select whether to display or hide the icon
on the map or how to display the map.
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then
touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Info screen appears.
On (Always):
Display tracking for all journeys.
On (This journey):
Display tracking dots but erase them when
the navigation system is turned off (when
turning off the engine of your vehicle).
Off*:
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
Do not display tracking dots.
Twin View 2D/3D
You can select whether to display the left map
2 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
screen of the Twin Map View in 2D or in 3D.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2D*:
View*:
Displays the 2D map.
Displays the second corner ahead of the vehi-
cle on the map.
Hide:
Hides the second corner ahead of the vehicle
on the map.
Bluetooth Connected
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for
current status of the phone connection via
Bluetooth wireless technorogy.
View*:
3D:
Displays the 3D map.
Displays the icon on the map.
Hide:
Hides the icon on the map.
Show Mute Button
Selects whether to display or hide the voice
guidance mute key on the map.
View*:
Displays the voice guidance mute on the map.
Hide:
Hides the voice guidance mute key from the
map.
Show Traffic Incident
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic
notification icon on the map when incidents
are on your route.
Page 70
View*:
Displays the icon on the map.
Hide:
Hides the icon on the map.
Second Maneuver Arrow
Selects whether to display or hide the second
corner ahead of the vehicle on the map
(except for [Route View]).
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Shortcut
: Dial Favorite 1 to 5
You can make a call to the phone number reg-
istered in [Dial Favorite].
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen. In
the list displayed onscreen, the items with red
checks are displayed on the map screen. Touch
the shortcut you want to display and then touch
[OK] when a red check appears. You can select
up to five shortcuts.
➲ “Registering a phone number in Dial
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire route (currently set).
➲ Checking the whole route overview ➞ Page
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then
touch [Short-Cut Selection].
: Stock Info
The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.
Displays stock prices.
: Browse
Displays XM tuner browsable information.
Page 74
: My Favorites
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
Displays information on your favorite brows-
able item for XM tuner.
2 Touch the item which you want to set in
the shortcut menu.
➲ Displaying favorite browsable information
The item with a red check mark is displayed in
the shortcut menu.
: Traffic On Route
Displaying a list of traffic information on the route.
➲ Displaying traffic information on the route
: Registration*
Register to the Address Book information on
the location indicated by the scroll cursor.
: Traffic Events
Displaying a list of traffic events information.
: Vicinity Search*
: Day/Night Display
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
Switches Day/Night Display setting.
➲ Searching the facilities surrounding a cer-
3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
: Overlay POI*
Displaying POI on the Map
Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
Displays on the map the icon for surrounding
facilities (POI).
: Volume*
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then
touch [Overlay POI].
Display [Volume Setting].
2 Touch [Display] to turn it [On].
❒ If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it
[Off]. (Even if [Display] is turned [Off],
the POI selection setting is retained.)
: Phone Book*
Displays [Phone Book].
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch the category you want to display.
3 Touch or to switch to the next page or
previous page.
4 Touch [Select Detail].
On this screen, you can operate the following
[Select All]:
items.
Selects all detailed categories that are
included in that category. (E.g. all categories
of restaurants including Japanese and fast
food.)
Day:
You can check the color of the Day screen.
Night:
You can check the color of the Night screen.
❒ To return the previous screen, touch
[Back].
[Deselect All]:
Deselects the selected category.
5 Touch the desired detailed category.
❒ You can select up to 100 items from the
detailed category.
About “Roads without turn by-
turn instructions”
Routable roads (The route displayed and high-
lighted in purple color) have only basic data and
can only be used to plot a navigable route. Pio-
neer Navigation will only display a navigable
route on the map (only the arrival guidance for
the destination or a waypoint is available). Please
review and obey all local traffic rules along the
highlighted route. (For your safety.)
The category already set will have a red check
mark.
No turn-by-turn directions or arrow icons will be
displayed on these roads.
6 To finish the selection, touch [OK].
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this
road, the icon
that the guidance is not available with this type of
road. The icon will be indicated for the road
will be displayed, indicating
Browsing the Map Color Expla-
nation
with which the guidance is available.
You can browse the type of the roads and areas
displayed on the map.
The Close-up of intersection function, Auto
Reroute function, Changing the view to Guide
View, or Route View are not available.
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then
touch [Map Legend].
2 Touch the type which you want to see.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the View Mode for the
Navigation Map
Changing the Setting of Naviga-
tion Interrupting Screen
You can change the map display mode.
Setting whether or not to switch to the navigation
screen automatically when your vehicle
approaches a guidance point such as an inter-
section while displaying a screen other than navi-
gation.
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then
touch [View Mode].
2 Touch the type which you want to set.
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.
2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the
setting.
Setting the Map Color Change
between Day and Night
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can set the timing to change the
combination of the map color.
On*:
Switching from audio operation screen to nav-
igation screen.
Off:
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.
Screen is not switched.
2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to change the
setting.
Changing the Map Color
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
You can set the map color to bluish or reddish.
Automatic*:
You can change the colors of a map between
daytime and nighttime according to whether
the vehicle lights are On or Off.
Day:
1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.
2 Touch [Road Color] to change the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
The map is always displayed with daytime col-
ors.
Blue*:
Changes the map color to bluish.
Red:
❒ To use this function with [Automatic], the
Orange/white lead of the navigation sys-
tem must be connected correctly.
Changes the map color to reddish.
❒ Check the color change with the [Map
Legend].
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Setting a Route to Your Destination
• Searching for POIs by specifying a city name
first
• Searching a POI from a name of the facilities
directly
• For safety reasons, these route-setting
functions are not available while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting
details).
Searching for POIs by specifying a cat-
egory first
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-
tion and select the state or province (or
territory).
❒ Some information on traffic regulations
depends on the time when the route calcula-
tion is performed. Thus, the information may
not correspond with a certain traffic regula-
tion when your vehicle actually passes the
location. Also, the information on the traffic
regulations provided will be for a passenger
vehicle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regu-
lations when driving.
➲ Selecting the state where you want to
3 Touch [Category].
Category
Searching for Points of Interest
(POI)
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amusement
parks or restaurants, is available. By entering the
POI Name, you can search for a POI.
4 Touch the desired category.
POI’s are divided into several categories.
❒ You can also narrow down the search range
by initially specifying the name of the city
where your destination is located and also by
initially specifying the category.
❒ Use the functions [POI Search] and [Vicin-
ity Search] in different situations. In [POI
Search], the distance is not limited, but in
[Vicinity Search], the distance for the search
is limited to within a 16 km (10 mile) radius.
If the category is not sub-divided into more
detailed categories, the list will not be dis-
played. Proceed to Step 6.
[Name] :
Touch if you want to first specify the POI
name.
Searching for Points of Interest
(POI)
[City] :
The following three methods are available for
searching facilities by POI:
Touch if you want to first specify the destina-
tion city or area.
• Searching for POIs by specifying a category
first
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Back]:
❒ You can use this sort function only when
Return the Destination menu.
the candidates are less than 2000.
5 Touch the detailed category.
8 Touch desired POI for your destination.
6 Input the name of the facilities.
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.
Page 29
[City] :
Touch to specify the destination city or area,
and then input the city name. (This is available
only when [Name] is blank.)
❒ Touching
displays a map of the sur-
roundings of the selected POI.
❒ If the selected POI is the name of a chain
of outlets and consequently the same store
name applies to different locations (the
number of outlets appears next to the
chain’s name), touch the name of the POI
to display a list of those POIs with city
name and street name, touch to set the
POI as your destination.
[List]:
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in
the text box (suggested character in white is
invalid). Touch the desired facility in the list to
proceed to the next step.
❒ When the options are narrowed down to
six or less, a list of the matched facilities
automatically appears.
When you enter the same characters as
those entered previously, the system auto-
matically displays the character string that
follows the entered characters. (Auto fill-in
function.)
Searching for POIs by specify-
ing a city name
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].
❒ If less than six POIs in a detailed category
are registered, the screen for inputting the
POI name is not displayed. Please proceed
to Step 7.
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-
tion and touch [OK].
➲ Selecting the zone where you want to
7 Touch
Touching
.
3 Touch [City].
sorts the items in the list
4 Input the name of the city that has the
in the order of distance.
facility you want to search.
Searching range is approximately 10 miles (16
km) square from the current location.
❒ Auto fill-in function is available.
:
Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical
order.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A list of cities that include the entered charac-
ter appears.
4 Touch the facility from the list.
[List]:
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in
the text box (suggested character in white is
invalid). Touch the desired city in the list to
proceed to the next step.
5 Input the name of the facilities.
You can also narrow down the candidates by
specifying the category before the name
input.
❒ Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cat-
egory of facities with the same name.
and 8)
to 8)
Finding a POI in your surround-
ings
Searching a POI from a name of
the facilities directly
You can search for Points Of Interest in your sur-
roundings. Use it to find a POI to visit during a
journey. Searching range is approximately 10
miles (16 km) square from the current location.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [POI Search].
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
The list of POI categories appears.
2 Touch the state code key of the destina-
tion and touch [OK].
➲ Selecting the zone where you want to
2 Touch the desired category.
Category
3 Input the name of the facilities.
The category already set will have a red check
mark. When only a few types of the detailed
categories are selected, blue check marks will
appear.
❒ Auto fill-in function is available.
A list of the facilities that include the entered
character appears.
[OK] :
[List]:
Start search with the selected category.
[Back] :
Lists candidate based on yellow characters in
the text box (suggested character in white is
invalid). Touch the desired facility in the list to
proceed to the next step.
Returns to the previous screen.
[Set] :
Display the screen for registering POI short-
cuts.
❒ If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.
) before selecting category on the list,
you can start searching for facilities
directly by the category registered on the
POI shortcut.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If you want to search for facilities by using
both marked category and POI shortcut,
select some categories in the list and then
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.
3 Touch [Select Detail].
Distance to the facility
8 Touch desired POI for your destination.
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.
Page 29
[Select All]:
Selects all detailed categories that are
included in that category. (E.g. all categories
of restaurants including Japanese and fast
food)
❒ When you touch
, the POIs around the
specified location are shown on a map.
Page 43
[Deselect All]:
Deselects the selected category.
Searching for the facilities
around the scroll cursor
4 Touch the desired detailed category.
Searching range is approximately 10 miles (16
km) square from the scroll cursor.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor
to the place where you want to search for
POI.
2 Touch
.
The category already set will have a red check
mark.
The shortcut menu appears.
3 Touch
.
5 Touch [Back].
Returns previous screen.
See Step 2 of [Finding a POI in your surround-
ings] for the following operations.
Page 53
6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category,
and touch [OK].
❒ This can be used when Vicinity Search is
selected in Short-Cut Selection.
❒ The distance indicated in the search result
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the
facility.
The POI in the selected category or subcate-
gory is searched.
❒ You can select from the detailed category
up to 100 items.
7 Touch [OK].
Names of POIs and their distance from your
current location appear. They are listed in
order from nearest to farthest. To the left of
each item is an icon indicating the category.
❒ The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your
favorite categories. Touching the shortcuts
icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate-
gory.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ [Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu
Searching for Your Destination
by Specifying the Telephone
Number
searches your surroundings. On the other
hand, in the case of
in the Shortcut
scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will
be searched.
If you know the telephone number of your desti-
nation, you can quickly search for your destina-
tion by specifying the telephone number.
❒ You can also search for the phone number
[Phone #] on [Address Book].
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Telephone
Search].
The telephone number entry screen appears.
2 Input a telephone number.
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.
Page 29
❒ If there is more than one place for the
number input, a list of those places is dis-
played. Touch the item you want in the list.
Route Calculation to Your Home
Location or to Your Favorite
Location
If your home location is registered, the route
home can be calculated by a single touch of the
touch key from the navigation menu. Also, you
can register one location, such as your work-
place, as your favorite location, and the route is
calculated in a similar way.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Return Home] or
[Go to].
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Destination from the
Registering/deleting POI Short-
Destination History and Address cuts
Book
You can register up to six shortcuts to your favor-
ite POI. You can also change or delete the regis-
tered shortcuts.
Any place that has been searched before is
stored in [Destination History]. Places that you
have registered manually, such as your home,
are stored in [Address Book]. Simply select the
place you want to go to from the list and a route
to that place will be calculated.
Registering a POI shortcut
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
2 Touch [Set].
Page 65
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Address Book] or
[Destination History].
2 Touch your destination name.
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
3 Touch [Add].
The “Location confirmation screen” appears.
Page 29
❒ You can also see the destination by touch-
ing
on the right of the list.
Displays a POI category list.
4 Touch category.
Page 43
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch the POI selection method.
Touching a category adds that category to the
shortcuts.
❒ You can register a POI shortcut by touch-
ing
on the map. The registering steps
are the same as described above.
Deleting a POI shortcut
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].
❒ You can also touch
in the shortcut
menu.
2 Touch [Set].
3 Touch [Delete].
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
4 Touch the category to be deleted.
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.
All (None):
A red check will appear or disappear on all
registered categories.
5 Touch [Delete].
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Registering and Editing Locations
Registering your home and your
favorite location
• For safety reasons, these functions are not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and put on the parking
brake before setting your route (see page
18 Interlock for details).
You can register one home location and one
favorite location. You can change the registered
information later. You might find it useful to regis-
ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your
favorite location.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Defined Locations].
Registering Locations Overview
2 Touch [Go to].
Registering places you visit frequently saves time
and effort. Also, routes to registered locations
can be calculated easily by touching the corre-
spond touch key. This registered location infor-
mation can also be modified.
When registering your home location, touch
[Home].
The registered locations are categorized into
the following three types:
•
: Home location:
Register your home location here. Once your
home location is registered, the route to your
home can be set by simply touching [Return
Home] in the Destination menu. Only one
location can be registered.
3 Search for a location to register.
You can select a method of location search.
•
: Favorite location:
Register here the point that you frequently
visit (for example, your office). Once your
favorite location is registered, route to your
favorite location can be set by simply touching
[Go to] in the Destination menu. Only one
location can be registered.
➲ Information on searching locations to reg-
•
: (default): Address Book entry:
Register here other points you often visit.
Once locations are registered, you can set the
route by selecting an item from Address
Book.
❒ If you select [Map Search], move the
scroll cursor to the place you want to set
and touch [OK].
❒ The items in Address Book are automatically
updated in alphabetic order. However, [Home
location] and [Favorite location] always
appear at the top (if you registered them).
4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you
want to register and touch [OK].
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-
tered information screen appears.
➲
“Editing a location’s information”
Page 61
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch [OK].
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-
tered information screen appears.
Page 61
Completes the registration.
Registering location into
Address Book
4 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.
The Address Book can store up to 400 regis-
tered locations. These can include home loca-
tion, favorite places, and destinations you have
already registered.
Registering location by Address
Book
1 Touch [Address Book] in the Destination
menu.
Registering location by scroll mode
1 From Shortcut Selection, select Registra-
tion.
2 Touch [Add].
2 Search for the location, and touch
[Scroll].
The scroll mode is established.
3 Select the search method, search the loca-
tion, and display the map.
4 When the map of the location you want to
register is displayed, touch [OK].
❒ When you want to register the location
after you move to another location, touch
the screen to scroll the map, and place the
cursor on the point you want to register.
3 Display the shortcut menu, and touch
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-
tered information screen appears.
Page 61
.
5 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The viewpoint of the Address
Book
(6)
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
❒ Active if the list item number is not equal
to 0 and current sort is not by distance
form current position.
menu, then touch [Address Book].
(4) (5)
(7)
:
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
It is the default sorting order.
❒ Active if the list item number is not equal
to 0 and current sort is not by alphabeti-
cally.
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(8)
:
(1) Home location:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the
recently used items.
The item displayed with
icon is the home
❒ Active if the List item number is not equal
to 0 and current sort is not by last used.
(9) [Add]:
location. When you touch this, the route is cal-
culated, and the route guidance screen
appears.
The screen for selecting the method for regis-
tering the location in Address Book appears.
Page 60
➲ “Registering your home and your favorite
(2) Favorite location:
(10) [Delete]:
The item displayed with
icon is the favor-
Deletes the registered locations.
Page 64
ite location. When you touch this, the route is
calculated, and the route guidance screen
appears.
(11) [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
➲
Editing a registered location’s
information
(3) Address Book entry:
When you touch this, the route is calculated,
and the route guidance screen appears.
In the Address Book menu, touching
on the
right-hand side of the place displays the Edit reg-
istered information screen.
(4)
:
The map of that location can be displayed.
➲ “Calculating the route to the destination”
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Address Book].
2 Touch
on the right-hand side of the
(5)
:
location whose information you want to
edit.
The information related to that place can be
edited.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(7)
(6) (5)
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1) Name
You can enter the desired name.
(2) Pronunciation
You can enter the desired pronunciation inde-
pendently from the name. The registered pro-
nunciation is used for voice recognition.
Chapter 17
❒ If there are multiple locations with a regis-
tered sound effect within approx. 0.19
miles (300 m) radius, then only the closest
one will play.
❒ When you switch the language of the navi-
gation system, the registered pronuncia-
tions cannot be used for voice recognition.
(3) Phone #
The phone number of the registered location.
You can dial this number by using (8).
❒ You can search by registered telephone
number.
Changing a name
1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].
The message confirming whether or not to
register the entered name as voice command
is displayed.
(4) Icon
The symbol displayed on the map and
Address Book.
Alternative option:
(5) Picture
No:
As you approach the location, the registered
image appears.
When not registering a name as a voice com-
mand, select [No].
You can register the picture stored in the navi-
gation system. You can also import and regis-
ter a picture shot from a digital camera etc.,
by using a CD-ROM.
2 Enter a new name, then touch [OK].
The current name appears in the text box.
Delete the current name, and enter a new
name between 1 and 22 characters long.
(6) Sound
The selected operating sound is played.
(7) Modify Location
3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch
[Yes].
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.
The details you set are registered, and the
Address Book menu appears.
Alternative options:
(8) Dial
Only when the Bluetooth unit is connected to
the navigation system and the cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology is also con-
nected, you can make a phone call to the reg-
istered phone number (3) by touching [Dial].
Page 86
No:
Jump to the pronunciation input screen.
Repeat:
You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the
name you entered.
No sounds can be output during
.
❒ When you confirm the pronunciation,
is shown on the left side of the location
name displayed in “Address Book menu”.
This icon indicates that this name can be
used as a voice command during voice
operation.
When you approach the registered loca-
tion while travelling
When the location with a sound effect and an
image are registered comes into approx. 0.19
miles (300 m) radius from the vehicle position,
the sound effect plays and the image appears.
❒ You cannot change the name of your
home.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a pronunciation
Selecting an icon to appear on the map
1 Touch [Pronunciation], then touch [Yes].
1 Touch [Icon].
2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch
[OK].
2 Touch the desired icon to appear on the
map.
The current name appears in the text box
(when available). Delete the current name,
and enter a new name between 1 and 22 char-
acters long.
3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch
[Yes].
The details you set are registered, and the
Address Book menu appears.
Alternative options:
The Address Information menu appears.
❒ You cannot change the icon of your home
or of your favorite location.
No:
Jump to the pronunciation input screen.
Repeat:
Customizing the picture
You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the
name you entered.
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the
picture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).
No sounds can be output during
.
❒ When you confirm the pronunciation,
is shown on the left side of the location
name displayed in the Address Book
menu. This mark indicates that this name
can be used as a voice command during
voice operation.
Page 97
You can customize a picture for the registered
point. Some pictures are already stored in the
hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-
mat pictures, such as a picture on your digital
camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn the pic-
tures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and insert
that to the navigation system, you can use them.
❒ You cannot change the name of your
home.
❒ If nothing is entered in the text box, you
cannot use that item as the voice com-
mands.
Here, a method for changing the picture is
described with an example of loading a picture
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-
tem.
Entering or changing a phone number
1 Touch [Phone #].
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert
2 Input a phone number, then touch [OK].
The Address Information menu appears.
❒ To change a registered phone number,
delete the existing number and then enter
a new one.
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.
2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import
from Disc].
The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)
is displayed.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
Back to Original:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Touching other than [Import from Disc]
allows you to select an image stored on the
hard disk drive.
Deleting Address Book informa-
tion
Items registered in the Address Book can be
deleted. All entries of the data in the Address
Book can be deleted at once.
3 Touch a picture you want to set.
4 Touch [Yes].
On this screen, you can select the following
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
items:
menu, then touch [Address Book].
No:
2 Touch [Delete].
This is selected when you want to change to
another picture. Return to Step 3.
“Address Book Delete screen” appears. (or
“Destination Delete screen” appears.)
Selecting sound
3 Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears by the selected loca-
tion.
1 Touch [Sound].
2 Select the desired sound.
❒ To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].
3 Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.
4 Touch [Set].
No sounds can be output during
.
On this screen, you can select the following
Changing the position of locations
items:
All:
1 Touch [Modify Location].
The map of the selected area and its sur-
roundings appears.
Selects all locations.
None:
Displayed when all locations are being
selected. Cancels all selected locations.
2 Touch the screen to change its position,
then touch [OK].
4 Touch [Delete].
5 Select [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
Alternative option:
No:
The display shown in Step 4 appears.
❒ Because deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to delete by mistake.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Destination History Operations
The points to which route has been calculated in
the past are automatically saved in Destination
History.
❒ If no location is stored in Destination History,
you cannot select [Destination History]. (If
you perform a route calculation, you can
select [Destination History].)
1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Destination History].
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1) Destination history:
Touch to calculate the route. The route guid-
ance screen appears.
(2) [Delete]:
Deletes the registered location.
Page 64
(3) [Back]:
Returns previous screen.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Using Traffic Information
Using XM NavTraffic Informa-
tion
Viewing traffic list
Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a list.
This allows you to check how many traffic inci-
dents have occurred, their location, and their dis-
tance from your current position.
If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) attached
to the navigation system, and have an active sub-
scription to XM NavTraffic service, you can view
current traffic conditions and information on your
navigation display. When the unit receives
updated traffic information, the navigation sys-
tem will overlay the traffic information on your
map, and also display detailed text information
when available. When you are traveling along a
route and there is traffic information on your cur-
rent route, the system will detect it, and ask you if
you would like to be rerouted, or suggest another
route automatically.
Checking traffic information
Traffic information except traffic flow information
is displayed onscreen in a list.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Traffic Events].
The list with received traffic information is
shown.
2 Touch or to view the incident list.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed in the list.
❒ The system acquires the traffic information in
the range between 20 miles and 100 miles in
diameter from the vehicle position. (Accord-
ing to the amount of traffic information
acquired at the same time, the reception
range is automatically adjusted in the range
between 20 miles and 100 miles with your
vehicle at the center.)
(1)
(2) (4)
(5)
(3)
❒ The navigation system provides the following
functions by using the information from XM
NavTraffic:
(7)
(6)
(1) Street or place
(2) Direction
• Displaying a list of traffic information
• Displaying traffic information on a map
• Suggesting a route to avoide traffic con-
gestion by using traffic information
(3) Incident
(4) Distance to the location
(5) The incident numbers currently dis-
played and the total number of incidents
❒ The incidents that have already been read
will be displayed in white. Unread inci-
dents will be in yellow.
❒ The term “traffic congestion” in this section
indicates the following types of traffic informa-
tion: stop and go, stopped traffic, closed/
blocked roads. This information is always
taken into consideration when checking your
route, and the information related with these
events cannot be turned off. If you select other
traffic information in [Traffic Settings], the
information can be displayed in a list or on a
map.
(6) Sort key
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position.
Page 70
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic
Events], the list will be sorted according to
the linear distance from the vehicle position to
the traffic information.
❒ The method for checking the content dis-
played on the screen is the same for
“Checking traffic information”.
Checking traffic flow information on the
list
The traffic flow information on the route can also
For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic
On Route], the list will be sorted according to
the distance from the vehicle position to the
traffic information.
be displayed as an onscreen list.
:
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Traffic Flow].
The list with the traffic flow information is
shown.
You can sort the traffic information according
to the incident.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, accidents,
road works, and others.
(mph):
You can sort the traffic information by the
average speed.
:
When new traffic information is received, cur-
rent information is changed, or old informa-
tion has been removed, the list is updated to
reflect the new situation.
❒ The other methods for checking the traffic
flow information displayed on screen is the
same for “Checking traffic information”.
(7)
Confirming traffic information
on the map
Touching
allows you to check the location
on a map. (Traffic information without posi-
tional information cannot be checked on a
map.)
❒ A line displayed only when the map scale
is 2.5 mile (5 km) or lower.
❒ Icon appears only when the scale on the
map is 10 mi (20 km) or lower. (If the scale
is 1 mi (2 km) or higher, the icons are
resized smaller.)
3 Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
❒ Traffic-related items are not displayed on
“City Map”.
• Touching an incident you want to see
allows you to view the detailed information
of the incident. If the information cannot be
displayed on one screen, touch or to
view the remaining information.
Traffic event icon and line
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
Traffic event icon
4 Touch [Back] to return to the list with
traffic information.
A list with traffic information appears again.
Checking traffic information on the
route
All traffic information on the current route
(including traffic flow information) is displayed
onscreen in a list.
with yellow line:
Stop and go traffic
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].
The currently set traffic information on the
route appears on screen.
with red line:
Stopped traffic
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting alternative route to
avoid traffic congestion
with black line:
Closed/blocked roads
The navigation system checks at certain time
intervals whether or not there is the traffic infor-
mation on your route. If the navigation system
detects any traffic congestion on your current
route, the system tries to find a better route in the
background.
etc.:
For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-
tings] in the Information menu.
Page 70
If you want to check the traffic information details
at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon
❒ Following types of traffic incidents on the
route will be checked: stop and go, stopped
traffic and closed/blocked roads.
such as
and touch . This allows you to view
place names and other detail information.
❒ The traffic flow information is taken into
account when the traffic flow is not selected
in [Traffic Settings].
Traffic flow information icon and line
Red, yellow, or green blinking lines may appear
on either side of a road. In addition to these blink-
ing lines, a round icon with a number may appear
on the map. The number in the icon indicates the
actual average speed of that specific area. These
colors indicate the average speed at which traffic
is flowing along these streets. Here is a guide to
the colors and the average speed they indicate:
Checking traffic congestion automati-
cally
If there is information of traffic congestion on
your current route and if an alternative route can
be found, the navigation system will recommend
you new alternative route automatically. In such
case, the following screen will appear.
❒ There is no action if the system cannot find
any traffic congestion information on your
route or the system cannot find an alternative.
Red: average speed in this area is between 5
mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)
Yellow: average speed in this area is between 20
mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph (72
km/h) or faster (An icon without a number indi-
cates the average speed of the road is more than
45 mph (72km/h))
Distance from the current position of
your vehicle to the point of entry into
the new route.
Difference in distance and travel time
between existing route and new route.
❒ The traffic flow line can be used only when
On this screen, you can select the following
[Traffic Settings] is selected.
items:
New:
Page 70
The recommended route is displayed on the
screen.
If you want to check the traffic information details
at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon
Current:
The current route is displayed on the screen.
such as
and touch . This allows you to view
OK:
place names and other detail information.
The displayed route is set.
❒ When no selection is made, the current route
will be automatically selected after a short
while.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The traffic information displayed on the
notification icon is the traffic information
on the route closest to the vehicle position.
If you touch [Detour], the route is recalcu-
lated by taking into account not only this
information, but also all traffic congestion
information on the route.
Checking traffic information manually
Touching notification icon on the map screen
allows you to check traffic information on your
route while icon is displayed. Only if there is any
traffic information on your route, notification icon
is displayed on the navigation map screen.
❒ Notification icon will not appear when your
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
vehicle deviate from route.
❒ Traffic flow information is not taken into
account if [Traffic Flow] in [Traffic Set-
tings] is not checked.
List:
Only the three most recent events are listed
for the traffic information on your route.
Back:
1 Set [Show Traffic Incidents] to [View].
The message disappears, and the map display
reappears.
For the subsequent operations, see “Checking
traffic congestion automatically”.
2 Press the MAP button to display the cur-
rent location.
The icon appears when the system acquires
traffic information on the current route.
3 Touch icon during the icon is displayed.
Selecting traffic information to
display
Notification icon
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-
vice, and you can select which types will be incor-
porated and displayed on your navigation system.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].
The displayed icon indicates the type of the
traffic information.
2 Touch [Displayed traffic information].
The names of the displayed traffic information
items and a list of icons appears on the
screen.
4 Touch [Detour] to search alternative
route.
❒ Only if the system can find the information
related traffic congestion, [Detour] will be
enable.
After touching [Detour], the route is recalcu-
lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur-
rent route into account.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch the traffic information item to dis-
play.
A red check appears next to the selected traf-
fic information.
❒ [Flow Info] includes not only whether or
not to display the icon on the map, but also
whether or not to take the flow information
into account when rerouting.
❒ Touching [ALL (None)] selects or deselect
all traffic information.
4 Touch [OK].
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
❒ The following types of traffic congestion
cannot be deselected and are always dis-
played and taken into consideration: stop
and go, stopped traffic, and closed/
blocked roads.
5 Touch [Back].
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using XM Tuner and Other Information
You can switch the upper line to input the
number and marks.
Using the XM Tuner to View
Stock, Sports, and Other Infor-
mation
❒ The method for inputting the text is almost
same as for inputting street names.
When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected,
you can receive stock price, sports and other
information, and display it onscreen. You may
also register favorite information on the naviga-
tion system.
❒ If the input ticker symbol does not match
in full the actual ticker symbol for the
stock, you may not be able to find it.
Deleting stocks to be displayed
onscreen
Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12
stocks are already registered, delete as many
entries as necessary to add new stocks.
Displaying stock prices
Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].
2 Touch [Delete].
3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want to
delete.
A red check appears next to the ticker you
touched.
The screen displays a list of stock prices.
❒ Although the stock price information dis-
played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-
onds (approx.), these prices are not real-
time values.
❒ To delete all registered stocks, touch [All].
Red checks will appear next to all tickers.
4 Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
Registering stocks to be displayed
5 Touch [OK].
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Stock Info].
2 Touch [Add].
3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you
want to display, then touch [OK].
[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper], [Sym.]:
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying browsable informa-
tion
Displaying favorite browsable
Information
XM special contents can be assigned as a short-
cut or [My Favorites] so that it can be accessed
without searching every time an update is
needed. The following are the instructions on
how to do it:
❒ The displayed items depend on the informa-
tion which is sent from each station.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Browse].
The screen will display a list of categories. The
information appearing onscreen is automati-
cally updated at regular intervals.
1 Store the desired item (topic).
Page 74
2 Touch a category you want to browse
from the list.
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].
A list of registered items (topics) appears on
the screen. Touch the item to display informa-
tion about this item.
3 Touch the topic you wish to view.
Deleting favorite browsable information
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [My Favorites].
2 Touch [Delete].
4 Touch an item (a topic) to display the con-
tents.
3 Touch the name of the items you want to
delete.
Submenu :
A red check appears next to the items you
touched.
Displays the submenu. If there is no submenu
for the contents, the [Submenu] will be invisi-
ble.
❒ To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].
Red checks will appear next to all items.
Store :
Registers the current item (topic) about which
information is displayed as a favorite.
Page 74
4 Touch [Delete].
5 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch [OK].
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Reception Status
of the XM Tuner
Emergency Info
The Emergency Info screen provides important
emergency information pertaining to your vehi-
cle, insurance, and current location. Such emer-
gency information could be useful in the event of
an accident or vehicle breakdown. The accuracy
of the personal information is dependent on the
accuracy of the information entered into the navi-
gation system by the user.
The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception
status and signal strength appear on screen. (The
information that is transmitted via XM DATA
cable is displayed in this screen.)
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [XM Status].
(1)
(2)
(3)
• The Emergency Info screen is only
intended to provide information to a driver
that may be useful during an emergency
situation, and does not replace the need to
call for emergency assistance, when nec-
essary.
(1) Status
Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT)
reception status, any one of the following may
appear.
Checking the information regis-
tered as Emergency Info
OK
No problem.
Updating
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
Updating encryption code.
Check antenna
Improper antenna connection.
Not Connected
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
(1)
(2)
(2) Signal Strength
Depending on the signal strength, any one of the
following may appear.
Very Strong
Strong
Marginal
(4)
(3)
(5)
Weak
The information registered as Emergency
No signal
Info appears on the screen.
(3) Radio ID
The radio ID appears.
(1) You are currently at :
Your current position is indicated by the street
❒ If you have subscribed to either XM audio only
or XM NavTraffic stand alone, you will see
[Updating] in the [Status]. This is because
the GEX-P10XMT is constantly checking to see
if you have decided to add the other service
while your navigation system is turned on. If
you subscribe to both services, appropriate
status will be shown in the [Status].
name, latitude, and longitude.
(2) Personal Information :
Your VIN number, insurance policy number, and
the telephone number of your insurance com-
pany can be displayed once entered by the user.
(3) Emergency TOW service phone :
The phone number of the subscribing Emergency
TOW service can be displayed once entered by
the user. The default or factory setting is the
phone number of the Emergency Roadside Assis-
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tance service provided by Signature’s Nationwide
Auto Club, Inc.
Dialing the correspond number in emer-
gency
1 year of free Emergency Roadside
Assistance service
This function can be valid only when all fol-
lowing conditions are satisfied:
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance
service is available to all registered owners and
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. The first year of Emergency Roadside Assis-
tance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your
navigation system is registered with Pioneer and
you sign up on-line with Signature’s Nationwide
Auto Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-
gation system with Pioneer. If you have not
signed up for this service with Signature’s
Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free one-
year period has expired, you are subject to
charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. You are also subject to be changed by Signa-
ture’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. for roadside
services not included in the Emergency Roadside
Assistance service. The terms and conditions
regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance
service provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclusively
by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. Please
contact Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.
for more information. The telephone number that
appears here by default is the toll free number for
this service. For additional details on registering
for this service, please check your product regis-
tration card included with this product. If you are
not interested in the free Roadside Assistance
service, this number can be edited and replaced
by your own roadside assistance telephone num-
ber.
• The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is
connected with navigation system.
• The communication for Hands-free phon-
ing is activate between the cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology and the
navigation system.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Emergency Info].
2 Touch
.
A list of telephone numbers appears
onscreen.
3 Touch the phone number you want to
dial.
The signal is transmitted to the selected
phone number.
❒ The police number is shown as 911 and can-
Touching
terminates the call.
not be changed.
❒ Touch [Back] to return to the previous
screen.
(4) Locate Car Service
➞ Page 77
(5) Dial each number
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Touch the selection method.
Searching for car service in an
emergency
In an emergency, you can search the Emergency
Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of your cur-
rent position and set the current route.
• The Emergency Info screen is only
intended to provide information to a driver
that may be useful during an emergency
situation and if they are in a safe location.
If not, or in all major accidents, call 911
directly.
Select All
Selects all detailed categories included in that
category.
Deselect All
Cancels the selected detailed categories.
Select Detail
Selects a detailed category from the list.
❒ If you want to search with more detailed
categories, touch [Select Detail]. When
the subcategory list appears, touch the
item and touch [Back]. When only a few
types of the detailed categories are
selected, blue check marks will appear.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, then touch [Emergency Info].
2 Touch [Locate Car Service].
5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,
and touch [OK].
The POI in the selected category or detailed
category is searched.
A list of auto services appears onscreen.
6 Touch the name of the facility to set the
route you want.
3 Touch the Category of the auto service
you want to use.
A red check appears next to the selected cate-
gory.
Displays the route to the selected facility.
❒ The Auto Service categories that can be
selected in the Emergency Info are: [Auto-
motive] and [Car Dealer].
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Edit TOW Service Phone
Registering user information
Register a towing company’s phone number.
❒ If touch [Default], and then TOW service
phone number restore default number.
Prepare the vehicle inspection certificate or
insurance certificate, and input the information
written on it.
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
Setting the Vehicle Dynamics
Display
menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].
2 Touch [Setup].
You can change the content of meter on the left
and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Display.
Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,
only the voltage and clock are available.
3 Touch the desired item to register your
information.
❒ The speed displayed is a guideline and may
not correspond to the actual speed.
1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.
Page 37
❒ If information is already registered, that
2 Touch the left or right meter.
Touch keys are displayed.
information will appear.
4 Input the number you wish to register,
then touch [OK].
3 Touch the items you want to display.
Completes the registration.
You can select the following items.
Voltage :
Edit VIN
Displays the power supply and voltage sup-
plied from the battery to this system.
Acceleration :
Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)
Edit Policy Number
Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-
played. The + sign indicates acceleration
while the – sign indicates deceleration.
Side Acceleration :
Register your insurance policy number.
Acceleration in a side direction such as when
turning, is displayed. The + sign indicates a
right turn, while the – sign indicates a left
turn.
Angular Velocity :
Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one
second (how far it has turned in a second).
Slope :
Edit Insurance Phone
Register your insurance company’s phone
number.
Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. The
+ side represents the rising angle, and the –
side the falling angle.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direction :
The direction your vehicle is traveling in is dis-
played.
Clock :
Current time is displayed.
Adjust Look :
Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for
selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the
patterns from among those displayed onscreen
to change the panel to the selected pattern.
❒ If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-
mum and minimum (green line) values
indicated in [Acceleration] and [Side
Acceleration] are reset.
❒ You cannot change the speedometer at the
center.
❒ Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings
menu enables you to perform a demon-
stration with random values.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Using Hands-free Phoning
❒ Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”
Hands-free Phoning Overview
for your reference.
❒ When the power of the navigation system
turns off, Bluetooth is also disconnected.
When the system restarts, the system auto-
matically attempts to reconnect the cellular
phone previously connected. Even when the
connection is cut for some reason, the system
automatically reconnects the specified cellu-
lar phone (except for the case where the con-
nection is cut by the cellular phone
• For your safety, avoid talking on the phone
as much as possible while driving.
If your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth tech-
nology, this navigation system can be connected
to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using this
hands-free function, you can operate the naviga-
tion system to make or receive phone calls. You
can also transfer the phone book data stored in
your cellular phone to the navigation system.
This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth
connection, and how to operate a cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation
system.
operation).
You can open [Phone Menu] directly to press
and hold the MENU button.
The following description assumes that the
device name of the cellular phone to be con-
nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set
to [My Mobile Phone].
Preparing communication
devices
❒ You can check the signal strength for connec-
tion between your cellular phone and Blue-
tooth unit with [Connection Status] in
[Hardware] Menu.
To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology on the navigation system,
the Bluetooth adapter (ND-BT1) (sold separately)
is required.
❒ You can set the voice volume and ring volume
with [Volume] in Settings Menu.
Precautions on using a cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth technology
❒ You can set to mute peripheral sounds during
By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-
rately), you can use the functions described
in this manual, including hands-free phoning
or address book transfer. To use these func-
tions, the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology that you want to connect
must have a supported profile that is the
same as the profile for the Bluetooth unit. For
the supported profile, refer to the owner’s
manual of the Bluetooth unit.
hands-free phoning.
While your mobile phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology is connected,
played on the map.
is dis-
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch [Navi].
Setting up for hands-free phon-
ing
The system searches the cellular phones
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the
connection and displays them in the list.
Before you can use the hands-free phoning func-
tion, you will need to set up the navigation system
for using that function. This entails registering
your cellular phone with the navigation system
and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection
between the navigation system and your cellular
phone.
6 Wait until your mobile phone appears in
the list.
❒ If you cannot find the cellular phone you
want to connect, check that the cellular
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless
technology connection.
Registering your cellular phone
You need to register your cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect
it for the first time. A total of five phones can be
registered. Two registration methods are avail-
able:
7 Select the cellular phone you want to reg-
ister from the list.
8 Enter the password of the navigation sys-
tem to register it using your cellular
phone.
• Registration from the navigation system
• Registration from the cellular phone
After the registration is completed, the follow-
ing screen appears.
❒ Once you registered that phone, you can
select that cellular phone from the list to con-
nect it without registration.
Page 83
❒ The default device name displayed on the cel-
lular phone is [PIONEER NAVI]. The default
password is [1111].
❒ If registration fails, repeat the procedure
from the beginning. If a connection still
cannot be established, try connecting
using your cellular phone.
Operating from the navigation system
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-
ogy on your mobile phone.
Operating from your cellular phone
For some mobile phone no specific action is
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your mobile phone.
9 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-
ogy on your mobile phone.
For some mobile phone no specific action is
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your mobile phone.
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
3 Touch [Phone Settings].
10Touch [Information] in the navigation
The phone settings screen appears.
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
4 Touch [Registration].
11Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12Touch [Registration].
2 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
3 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
Phone name currently connected or
selected as a target of connection
13Touch [Mobile].
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth
wireless technology connection.
14Operate your cellular phone to register
the navigation system.
4 Touch [Connection].
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-
word, enter the password of the navigation
system.
5 Touch a cellular phone name you want to
connect.
After the registration is completed, the follow-
ing screen appears.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message
appears, and the system returns to the phone
menu screen.
❒ To cancel the connection to your cellular
phone, touch [Cancel].
❒ If connection fails, check whether your cel-
lular phone is waiting for a connection,
and then repeat the procedure from step 4.
❒ If registration fails repeat the procedure
from the beginning.
Editing the device name
You can change the device name to be displayed
Connecting a registered cellular phone
The navigation system automatically connects
the cellular phone selected as a target of connec-
tion. However, connect the cellular phone manu-
ally in the following cases:
on your cellular phone. (Default is [PIONEER
NAVI].)
6 Touch [Information] in the navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
• Two or more cellular phones are registered,
and you want to manually select the cellular
phone to be used.
7 Touch [Phone Settings].
The phone settings screen appears.
• You want to reconnect a disconnected cellular
phone.
8 Touch [Device Name].
• Connection cannot be established automati-
cally for some reason.
9 Touch any key to enter the name you
want to set and then touch [OK].
❒ Up to 20 characters can be entered for a
device name.
❒ Unregistered cellular phones cannot be con-
nected.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless technor-
ogy on your mobile phone.
Editing the password
You can change the password to be used for
For some mobile phone no specific action is
necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless
technorogy. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your mobile phone.
authentication on your cellular phone. (Default is
[1111].)
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10Touch [Information] in the navigation
2 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
The call ends.
11Touch [Phone Settings].
❒ If the received voice is too quiet to hear, you
The phone settings screen appears.
can adjust the volume of the received voice.
12Touch [Password].
❒ Depending on the subscription status of the
caller ID service, the phone number of the
received call may not be displayed, and
[Unknown] appears instead.
13Touch any key to enter the password you
want to set and then touch [OK].
❒ Four to eight characters can be entered for
a password.
❒ You may hear a noise when you hang up the
phone.
Receiving a phone call
Making a phone call
You can use the navigation system to receive a
call hands-free.
You can make a phone call in many different
ways.
The map screen shows the icon while your cellu-
lar phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy is connected. You can recieve a hands-free
call only when the mobile phone is connected.
Direct dialing
1 Touch [Information] in the navigation
Connecting icon
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Dial].
The phone settings screen appears.
3 Input the phone number, and then touch
to make a call.
Answering an incoming call
The system informs you that it is receiving a call
by displaying a message and producing a ring
sound once.
1 When there is an incoming call, touch
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
.
ing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
When there is an incoming call, you can reject
the call by touching
.
❒ During a call, the
is displayed at the
right-hand side of the screen.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing from the dialed number history
or the received call history
Calling a number in the Phone Book
After finding the list in the Phone Book you want
to call, you can select the number and make the
call.
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
❒ Before using this function, you need to trans-
fer the phone book stored in your cellular
phone to the navigation system.
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
The list of either one appears.
3 Touch a name or telephone number from
the list to make a call.
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
Date and time of the call dialed or received
2 Touch [Phone Book].
The phone book screen appears.
3 Touch a name from the list to make a call.
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to
the first page of the contacts whose names
start with that letter.
4 Touch
to make a call.
To cancel the call, touch
.
Touch the entry in the list to make a call.
❒ To cancel the call, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
❒ When you make a call to the phone num-
ber in [Received Calls] without “+”, you
can add “+” in front of that number by
touching [+]. To delete “+”, touch [+]
again in that time.
Calling a number in the Dial Favorites
After finding the list in the Dial Favorite you want
to call, you can select the number and make the
call.
5 To end the call, touch
right of the screen.
at the top
❒ Before using this function, you need to set the
phone number from the phone book to Dial
Favorite.
❒ Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed
number and received call histories are
recorded automatically. When the number
of entries exceeds 30, the entries will be
deleted from the oldest one.
➲ Registering the phone number to Dial Favorite
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
❒ You can clear the dialed number or
received call history.
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
➲ Clearing the dialed number or received call
2 Touch [Dial Favorite].
The Dial Favorite screen appears.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5] to
make a call.
3 Touch
to make a call.
Touch the entry to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
Dialing the entry in the Address Book
You can make a call to the entry registered in the
address book.
.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
❒ You cannot make a call to locations if phone
number is not registered.
Dialing from the map
1 Display the Address Book.
You can make a call by selecting an icon of a reg-
istered location or a POI icon from the map
screen.
2 Touch
of the entry you want to call.
to make a call.
The detail screen appears.
❒ You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
3 Touch
1 Scroll the map, and point the cursor on an
icon on the map.
2 Touch
.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
The detail screen appears.
Dialing a facility’s phone number
You can make a call to facilities with phone num-
ber data.
3 Touch
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
to make a call.
.
1 Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity Search]
and display the detail information.
4 To end the call, touch
of the screen.
at the top right
2 Touch
of the entry you want to call.
The detail screen appears.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[No]:
Transferring the phone book
Stay the current entries and then adds new
data to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-
not be consolidated.)
You can transfer the data from the phone book*
stored in your cellular phone to the phone book
stored in the navigation system.
❒ If you want to keep the existing phone
book, select [No].
By transferring the phone book to the navigation
system, you can browse the data in the trans-
ferred phone book on the screen of the navigation
system. You can also select the entries in the
phone book to make a call from the navigation
system or edit the data on the navigation system.
4 Check that the following screen is dis-
played, and operate your cellular phone to
transfer the phone book entries.
The phone book entries in your cellular phone
are transferred to the navigation system. To
cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].
❒ Only the names and telephone numbers
can be transferred.
❒ Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone
Book” may be called by “Contacts”, “Business
card”.
❒ The Phone Book can hold a total of 400
❒ The transferred data can be edited on the
navigation system.
entries.
❒ The Hands-free phoning connection is discon-
nected to establish the connection for phone
book transfer. When the phone book is trans-
ferred, hands-free phoning is reconnected
automatically.
Registering a phone number in
Dial Favorite
You can register up to five entries in the phone
book. Registering the phone numbers that you
frequently use in Dial Favorite will ease the dial-
ing operation. The names registered in Dial
Favorite can be operated from the shortcut menu.
You can also use Voice Recognition to make a
call by saying the phone number.
❒ The phone book of this navigation system can-
not assign the multiple telephone numbers for
one person’s name.
1 Connect your cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Page 82
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
2 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Dial Favorite].
3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].
3 Touch [Set].
If there is a phone book already transferred,
the following screen appears.
The Phone book screen appears.
4 Touch the entry you want to register in
Favorite.
The Phone book Record screen appears.
5 Touch [OK].
The selected entry is registered in the corre-
sponding Dial Favorite.
[Yes]:
Deletes all phone numbers stored in the
phone book, and then transfers the data.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing a picture for phone book
record
Editing the Phone Book data
You can edit the imported phone book data or
add new data. You can edit [Name], [Phone
number], or [Picture]. You can also delete
unnecessary data.
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-
ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).
❒ The data cannot be transferred back to the
Page 97
cellular phone.
You can customize a picture for the phone book
record. Some pictures are already stored in the
hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-
mat pictures, such as a picture on your digital
camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn the pic-
tures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and insert
that to the navigation system, you can use them.
Here, a method for changing the picture is
described with an example of loading a picture
stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-
tem.
Adding new data
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Phone Book].
3 Touch
or [Add].
The edit screen appears.
❒ To add data by entering it as desired, touch
[Add].
4 Select the entry you want to edit.
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.
2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import
from Disc].
The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)
is displayed.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
[Name] or [Phone #]:
Back to Original:
Enter the name and the phone number to be
displayed in the phone book. Touch [OK] to
complete the input and return to the previous
screen.
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
❒ Touching other than [Import from Disc]
allows you to select a background image
stored on the hard disk drive.
❒ The name can be input 40 characters long
and phone number can be input 32 char-
acters long.
3 Touch a picture you want to set.
❒ The edited names and phone numbers are
reflected to the dialed number history and
the received call history. However, they are
not reflected to the data registered in [Dial
Favorite].
4 Touch [Yes].
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
No:
This is selected when you want to change to
another picture. Return to Step 3.
[Picture]:
Sets the image to be displayed when a call is
received.
➲ Customizing a picture for phone book
5 Touch [OK].
The selected data is added to the phone book.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting data
Deleting data
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
2 Touch [Phone Book].
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
3 Touch [Delete].
The Phone Book Delete screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete].
4 Touch the entry you want to delete.
A red check mark appears next to the selected
entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry
again.
4 Touch [Yes].
All history data is deleted, and the current
location screen appears.
❒ To cancel the deletion, touch [No].
Notes for hands-free phoning
General notes
• Connection to all cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaran-
teed.
• The line-of-sight distance between this naviga-
tion system and your cellular phone must be
10 meters or less when sending and receiving
voice and data via Bluetooth technology. How-
ever, the transmission distance may become
shorter than the estimated distance, depend-
ing on the environment in use.
5 Touch [Delete].
6 Touch [Yes].
The data is deleted, and the current location
screen appears.
❒ To cancel the deletion, touch [No].
• You cannot delete the registered cellular
phone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Return-
ing the Navigation System to the Default or
Factory Settings”, and delete it together with
other functions.
Editing the received call or
dialed number history
You can edit the data in the dialed number history
or the received call history. You can edit [Name],
[Phone number], or [Picture]. The edited
entries are registered in the phone book. You can
also delete the history data.
• With some mobile phones, the speakers of the
system may not produce a ring sound.
• If the private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-
formed.
Editing data
1 Touch [Information] in the Navigation
About registration and connection
menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].
• Operation of cellular phone varies depending
on the type of your cellular phone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your cellu-
lar phone for detailed instructions.
2 Touch [Dialled Numbers] or [Received
Calls].
3 Touch
.
About making and receiving calls
• You may hear a noise in the following situa-
tions:
The edit screen appears. Steps after this are
the same as for editing the phone book.
❒ The phone number cannot be edited if it is
already registered in the phone book.
— When you answer the phone by using the
button on the phone.
— When the person on the other end of line
hangs up the phone.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• With some cellular phones, even if you press
accept button on the cellular phone when a
call arrives, hands-free phoning may not be
performed.
• The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in the phone book. When one phone
number is registered under different names,
the name that starts with the alphabet that pre-
cedes that of the other is displayed.
• If the phone number of the received call is not
registered in the phone book, the phone num-
ber of the received call appears.
About received call history and dialed num-
ber history
• Calls made or editing performed only on your
cellular phone will not be reflected to the
dialed number history, or phone book in the
navigation system.
• You cannot make a call to the entry of an
unknown user (no phone number) in the
received call history.
• If calls are made by operating your cellular
phone, no history data will be recorded in the
navigation system.
About phone book transfer
• With some cellular phones, it may not be pos-
sible to transfer all items in the phone book at
one time. In this case, transfer item one by one
from your cellular phone.
• Depending on the cellular phone that is con-
nected to this navigation system via Bluetooth
technology, this navigation system cannot dis-
play the phone book correctly. (Some charac-
ters may be garbled or first name and last
name is put in reverse order.)
• If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, phone book may not be cor-
rectly transferred. (Image data cannot be
transferred from the cellular phone.)
❒ Depending on the cellular phone, phone book
transfer cannot be available.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions
Guidance
This setting controls the guidance volume of
• For safety reasons, these functions are not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and put on the parking
brake before setting your route (see page
18 Interlock for details).
navigation.
When you set this to
, a guidance is out-
, no guidance is
put. When you set this to
output.
Beep
This setting controls the beep tone volume of
navigation.
Phone Ringtone
Entering the Settings Menu
This setting controls the incoming ring tone
volume.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
navigation menu.
Phone Voice
This setting controls the incoming voice vol-
ume.
2 Touch [Settings] to display the Settings
menu.
❒ The Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice
adjustments are related to the cellular
phone featuring BT technology. No adjust-
ment is needed when the cellular phone
featuring BT technology is not connected.
❒ Volume of the audio source is adjusted by
the VOL (ꢀ/ꢁ) button of the navigation
system.
3 Change the setting.
❒ This section describes the details of the
setting for each item. Settings marked with
an asterisk (*) show that they are default or
factory settings.
3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
Setting the Volume Related to
the Guidance and Phone
Customizing the Regional Set-
tings
The sound volume for the navigation can be set.
You can separately set the volume of the route
guidance and the beep sound.
Changing the language for navi-
gation guidance and menu
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Volume].
You can select the language to be used for the
navigation function. (Once you change the lan-
guage, the program restarts.)
2 Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
• Once the installation of the program starts,
do not stop the engine of your vehicle and
do not switch off the navigation system
until the installation is completed and the
map of your surroundings appears.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
The time difference can be set from +3 to –3
hours.
then touch [Regional Settings].
2 Touch [Language].
4 If necessary, set to summer time.
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.
Touch [Summer Time] to change the time if
you are in the daylight saving period. This
turns the display below summer time [On].
3 Touch the language which you want to
use.
Once you change the language, the program
restarts.
5 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
❒ Touching [Back] returns you to the previ-
ous display.
❒ If you select [English with TTS], the
name of the next street you will pass is
vocally announced. If you select [English
without TTS], the name of the next street
you will pass is not vocally announced.
Customizing the keyboard lay-
out
You can select the type of keyboard to be used for
inputting characters.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
Setting the time difference
then touch [Regional Settings].
Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference
(+, –) between the time originally set in your navi-
gation system is set here.
2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout
which you want to use.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
You can also select summer time On/Off.
QWERTY:
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Regional Settings].
2 Touch [Time].
3
To set the time difference, touch [+] or [–].
QWERTZ
Time difference
ABC:
The time difference between the time origi-
nally set in the navigation system (Pacific
Standard Time) and the current location of
your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the
time difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes
the time difference display in one-hour incre-
ments.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AZERTY:
Checking the Setting Related
with Hardware
The hardware status, including the driving status
of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite, learn-
ing status of the 3D sensor, and cable connection
status etc., can be checked.
Changing the measure for dis-
play
Checking the connections of
leads and installation positions
This setting controls the unit of distance dis-
played on your navigation system.
Check that leads are properly connected between
the navigation system and the vehicle. Please
also check whether they are connected in the
correct positions.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Regional Settings].
2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Hardware].
ting.
mile*:
Show distance in miles.
Mile & Yard:
2 Touch [Connection Status].
The Connection Status screen appears.
Show distance in miles and yards.
km:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Show distance in kilometers.
Changing the virtual speed of
vehicle
When calculating expected time of arrival and the
number of hours to the destination, set the aver-
age speed for the freeway or ordinary roads using
[+] and [–].
(1) Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga-
tion system is shown. [0] is shown while the
vehicle is stationary.
(2) GPS Antenna
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from
how many satellites the signal is received. If
the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-
played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears. In
such case, please change the installation
position of the GPS antenna.
then touch [Regional Settings].
2 Touch [Average Speed].
3 Touch [+] or [–] to set their speed.
(3) Phone Connection Status
Indicates the connection status of the Blue-
tooth unit and the signal strength of cellular
phone. If the connection of Bluetooth unit is
correctly, [OK] is displayed. [NOK] appears
when the Bluetooth unit is not connected or
incorrectly connected.
❒ The estimated time of arrival is not neces-
sarily estimated based on this speed value.
❒ Signal strength may differ from the actual
signal strength on the cellular phone.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Depending on the cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth technology, signal strength
is not available.
Checking sensor learning status
and driving status
(4) Installation Position
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Hardware].
The installation position of the navigation sys-
tem is shown. That indicates whether the
installation position of the navigation system
is correct or not. If installed correctly, [OK]
appears. When the navigation system is
installed at an extreme angle exceeding the
limitation of the installing angle, [Incorrect
angle] will be displayed. When the angle of
the navigation system has been changed,
[Excessive vibration] will be displayed.
(5) Parking Brake
2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.
(5)
(4)
(1)
(6)
(7)
(2)
(3)
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is dis-
played. When the parking brake is released,
[Off] is displayed.
(1) Distance
Driving distance is indicated.
(2) Speed Pulse
(6) Power Voltage
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.
(3) Learning Status
The power voltage (reference value) provided
from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys-
tem is shown. If the voltage goes out of the
range from 11 to 15V, check that power cable
connection is correct.
Current driving mode is indicated.
(4) Degree of learning
Sensor learning situations of distance (Dis-
tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn (Left
Turn), and 3D detection (3D) are indicated by
the length of bars.
(7) Illumination
When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi-
cle are on, [On] is displayed. Small lamps of a
vehicle are off, [Off] is displayed. (If the
orange/ white lead is not connected, [Off]
appears.)
❒ When tires have been changed or chains
fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows
the system detects the fact that the tire
diameter has changed, and automatically
replaces the value for calculating distance.
❒ If the ND-PG1 is connected, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced auto-
matically.
(8) Back Signal
When the gear lever is shifted to [R], the sig-
nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (Either of
these is displayed depending on the vehicle.)
(5) Speed
Speed detected by the navigation system is
indicated. (This indication may be different
from the actual speed of your vehicle, so
please do not use this instead of the speedom-
eter of your vehicle.)
(6) Acceleration or deceleration/Rota-
tional speed
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
(7) Inclination
Degree of slope of the street is indicated.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Hardware].
To clear values...
If you want to delete the learned results stored in
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-
tus], touch the relevant result, then touch [Yes].
2 Touch [Installation Angle Setup].
3 Check the direction the LCD panel faces,
and touch the corresponding item.
❒ If you select [Learning Status], you can
select [Reset All] or [Reset Distance
Study]. To clear all learning statuses, touch
[Reset All]. To clear only the Distance study,
touch [Reset Distance Study].
❒ Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:
• When you changed the installation position
of the navigation system
Left:
• When you changed the installation angle of
the navigation system
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the
left from the center.
• When you moved the navigation system to
another vehicle
Center:
Select this when the angle is less than 5° to
❒ When the distance accuracy is low, touch
the left, and less than 5° to the right from the
center.
[Reset Distance Study].
❒ Touching [Reset All] returns the installation
angle setting also to the default or factory set-
ting. Reconfigure the setting.
Right:
Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the
right from the center.
❒ If the [Learning Status] in the [3D Cali-
bration Status] is [Simple hybrid], the
installation angle can be corrected.
❒ The navigation system can automatically use
its sensor memory based on the outer dimen-
sions of the tires.
Checking the device and version
information
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Hardware].
Correcting the installation angle
You can correct the installation angle of the navi-
gation system. Correcting the installation angle
improves the accuracy of sensor learning, even if
the unit is not facing center. Select the orienta-
tion of the LCD panel from the left, center, and
right.
2 Touch [Service Info Screen].
3 Check the device and version information.
Checking the hard disk informa-
tion
You can check the volume of the hard disk, cur-
rent used space and remaining space.
❒ The hard disk space (%) means a free space of
the music library. In some cases, even when
about 10% of free space is left, no more music
track may be recorded due to system restric-
tion.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Hardware].
4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you
want to register and touch [OK].
The location is registered, and the Edit regis-
tered information screen appears.
Page 61
2 Touch [Hard Disk Info].
Hard disk space (%)
5 Touch [OK].
Completes the registration.
Changing the Background Pic-
ture
Registering the Home Location
and Favorite Location
Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-
ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).
You can register one home location and one
favorite location. You can change the registered
information later. You might find it useful to regis-
ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your
favorite location.
Page 97
In the menu operation screen, you can customize
a picture for the background. Some pictures are
already stored in the hard disk drive, and you can
also import JPEG format pictures, such as a pic-
ture on your digital camera by using CD-R(-RW).
If you burn the pictures into a CD-R (-RW) by your
PC and insert that to the navigation system, you
can use them as background pictures.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Defined Locations].
2 Touch [Go to].
When registering your home location, touch
[Home].
The following two types of background pictures
can be changed:
• Navigation Background: Background pic-
ture of navigation menu screen.
• AV Background: Background picture during
the operation of audio source screen.
Here, a method for changing the background pic-
ture is described with an example of loading a
picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the naviga-
tion system as the background picture.
3 Search for a location to register.
You can select a method of location search.
1 Check that no disc is inserted, and insert
your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.
2 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Background Picture Setting].
The picture selected for each screen is indi-
cated on the right side of [Navigation Back-
ground] and [AV Background] items.
➲ Information on searching locations to reg-
❒ If you select [Map Search], move the
scroll cursor to the place you want to set
and touch [OK].
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch [Navigation Background] or [AV
Background].
Limitations for import the picture
When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the
total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater than
100MB by storing dummy data or the like. If
not, the disc may not be recognized with the
built-in DVD drive.
4 Touch [Import from Disc].
❒ You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing MP3
files or the Audio data part (CD-DA part) for
importing pictures.
❒ When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW), cre-
ate a folder named “Pictures” in the CD-R (-
RW), and store the picture files in this folder.
(Up to 200 picture files can be used in total
including pictures are already stored in the
hard disk drive and pictures in the CD-R (-
RW).)
The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-
RW) is displayed.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
❒ When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the num-
ber of folder hierarchy levels to eight.
Back to Original:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
❒ You can only use single-session format for
importing pictures.
❒ Touching other than [Import from Disc]
allows you to select a background image
stored on the hard disk drive.
❒ Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures
can be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-
tures cannot be used.
5 Touch a picture you want to set.
❒ You can only use standard characters (alpha-
bets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and numbers (0-9)
for the file name (international (accented)
characters cannot be used).
6 Touch [OK].
❒ Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944 pix-
els can be used. We cannot guarantee proper
operation for a picture bigger than this size.
If you touch [OK], the background image
starts changing. After a short while, the con-
firmation screen appears.
❒ If you want to change to another picture,
touch [Back] to return to Step 4.
❒ When the picture starts to change, do not
turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-
sage appears to indicate that the picture
has finished changing.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Demonstration Guid-
ance
This is a demonstration function for shops. After
a route is set, the simulation of the route guid-
ance to a destination is automatically displayed.
Normally, set this to [Off].
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu.
2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-
ting.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
On:
Repeat demo drive.
Off*:
Demo Mode is set off.
Correcting the Current Location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Modify Current Location].
2 Scroll the position where you want to set,
then touch [OK].
3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to set
the direction, then touch [OK].
Restoring the Default Setting
Reset various settings registered to the naviga-
tion system and restores to the default or factory
settings.
1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,
then touch [Restore Factory Settings].
2 Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.
❒ Touch [Back] to cancel clear the current
setting.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
You can play or use the following sources with
Selecting a source
the navigation system.
• DVD-Video
• CD
1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-
ation screen.
• MP3 disc
2 Touch the source icon to select the
desired source.
• Radio (FM)
• Radio (AM)
• Music Library
Source icon
➲ About the music library ➞ Chapter 12
This chapter describes how to use the audio
source and the basic operation of the audio
source.
Basic Operation
Switching the Audio operation
screen
1 Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-
ation screen.
❒ You can also press the AV button to switch
the source.
Press the AV button repeatedly to switch
between the following sources:
[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive)
— [LIBRARY] (Music library) — [FM] (FM
tuner) — [AM] (AM tuner) — [XM] (XM tuner)
— [SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) — [iPod] (iPod)
— [M-CD] (multi-CD) — [TV] (television) —
[AV INPUT] (video input) — [AUX] (Auxiliary
equipment) — [EXT 1] (external unit 1) —
[EXT 2] (external unit 2)
❒ Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.
(1)
❒ In the following cases, the sound source can-
not to be used:
— When a unit corresponding to each source
is not connected to the navigation system.
— When no disc is set in the navigation sys-
tem.
(1) Touch panel keys
❒ Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys.
If you touch the screen, the touch panel
keys are displayed again.
— When no magazine is set in the multi-CD
player.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— When [AUX Input] (auxiliary input) is set to
ꢀꢁ button:
Same function as P.LIST (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
[Off].
— When [AV Input] (video input) is not set to
ꢂꢃ button:
Same function as TRK (ꢂ/ꢃ) button.
[Video].
❒ The term “external unit” refers to future Pio-
neer devices that are not currently planned
for, or although devices are not fully con-
trolled by this navigation system, devices
enable control of basic functions. Two exter-
nal units can be controlled by this navigation
system. When two external units are con-
nected, the navigation system allocates them
to external unit 1 or external unit 2.
+, - button:
Same function as VOL (ꢂ/ꢃ) button.
BAND button:
Same function as [Band] touch key.
SOURCE button:
Same function as AV button.
❒ When the [Auto ANT] mode is set to
[Radio], the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed
by following the instructions below.
— Change the source from radio (AM or FM)
to another source.
— Turn the source off.
— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).
If the [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the
vehicle’s antenna can be stowed only when
the ACC is set to “OFF”.
About Steering Remote Control
❒ If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering
Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-
ing buttons can be used for operation:
PHONE MENU button
Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit
(sold separately ) is connected.
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button
Press to accept the call when there is an incom-
ing call.
In other situation, press to start the voice opera-
tion.
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button
Press to reject a call when there is an incoming
call.
Press to hang up the phone during talking on the
phone.
In voice operation, return to the previous screen.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to see the audio operation screen and how to display the Audio
Settings menu
Normal screen (e.g. CD)
(1)
Touch
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(1) Information plate
Displays the information (e.g. track title, etc.) about the source being played.
(2) Touch panel keys
Touch to operate the source being played.
(3) Detailed information
Displays the detailed information about the source being played.
(4) AV Settings key
Displays the AV Settings menu.
(5) Hide key
Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information. If you touch the screen, they
are displayed again.
(6) Audio Settings tab
Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings.
(7) System Settings tab
Switches the setting items to those for System Settings.
(8) Setting Items
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Music CD
Screen configuration
(3)
(1) (4) (2)
(5)
You can play a normal music CD using the built-
in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section
describes that operations.
(7)
(6)
Selecting [CD] as the source
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc
you want to play to disc loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
(8)
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [CD].
(2) Disc title indicator
Shows the disc title currently playing. (when
Page 99
available.)
❒ When being read in, Checking disc is dis-
(3) Playback method indicator
Shows which playback method has been
played.
selected.
About auto hard disk recording
(4) Track indicator
Shows the track number currently playing.
Navigation system can record the tracks of music
CD into the hard disk drive.
(5) Track title indicator
Shows the track title currently playing. (when
In default setting, the system starts recording
automatically when the unrecorded music CD is
inserted.
available.)
(6) Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing. (when
If you want to cancel the recording, touch [Stop].
Stop
available.)
(7) Play time indicator
Shows the playback time of the current track.
(8) Track list
Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.
Title display
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
Page 156
❒ A title information will be displayed when the
information is found in the Gracenote® Data-
base on the built-in hard disk drive.
❒ Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in
the Hardware Manual for more cautions
about handling each media.
❒ When multiple options of title information is
find or no title information exists, [–] is dis-
played. A title may be displayed if you update
the title information manually after recording
has finished.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If no title information exists in the Gracenote®
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the
date when the track was recorded is entered
automatically. If you want to display the title
information, enter the title manually after
recording has finished.
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-
ward
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next track.
Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the cur-
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-
ous track.
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward
Keep touching ꢂ or ꢁ to perform fast rewind
or forward.
Page 122
❒ The title information displayed on the CD play-
back screen and the recording screen is syn-
chronized with the one edited in the music
library. If you edit the title information in the
music library, the title displayed on each
screen will change accordingly.
❒ You can also perform these operations by
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
❒ Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the
beginning of the first track on the disc.
(4) Using to stop playback
When you stop playback by touching ꢃ, that
❒ When playing a CD TEXT disc, the list lets you
track number on the disc is memorized enabling
playback from that track when you play the disc
again.
see the track titles encoded in CD TEXT disc.
— Some discs have text information encoded
on the disc during manufacture. These
discs may contain such information as the
CD title, track title, artist’s name and are
called CD TEXT discs.
❒ To play the disc again, touch ꢀ.
(5) Repeat the current track
Each touch of
turn the repeat play on or off.
[Track Repeat] is displayed on the playback
❒ The maximum umber of characters are 32
characters. But the navigation system incor-
porates the proportional font. Therefore, the
number of the characters which you can dis-
play varies according to which of each charac-
ter.
method indicator during the track repeat.
❒ If you perform track search or fast forward or
rewind, repeat play is automatically canceled.
(6) Playing tracks in a random order
Touching
turns the random play on or off.
❒ If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-
(7) Scanning tracks of a CD
Touching
erly, an error message may be displayed.
turns the scan play on or off.
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the CD. When you find the desired
track touch
to turn scan play off.
Touch key operation
❒ After scanning of a CD is finished, normal
Touch keys
playback of the tracks will begin again.
(3)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(1)
(5) (6)
(7)
(1) Selecting a desired track from the list
Touch a desired track to play.
(2) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
[pause].
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc)
You can play a MP3 disc using the built-in DVD
drive of the navigation unit. This section
describes that operations.
(7) Folder and track list
Shows contents of the folder currently playing or
temporarily displayed.
(8) Bit rate
Shows bit rate of the file currently playing.
Selecting [ROM] as the source
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc
you want to play to disc loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
Touch key operation
Touch keys
(3) (6) (5)
❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [ROM].
Page 99
(3)
(2)
(4)
❒ When being read in, Checking disc is dis-
(10)
played.
❒ Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in
the Hardware Manual for more cautions
about handling each media.
(1)
(7) (8) (9)
(1) Selecting tracks from the list or viewing
contents of the folders
The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder
Screen configuration
names on a disc. If you touch a folder on the list,
you can view its contents. If you touch a track on
the list, you can play the selected track.
(1)
(3) (4)(5)(8)
(2)
(6)
❒ Touching or switches to the next or previous
page in the list.
❒ If the selected folder does not contain any
track which can be played, the track list is not
displayed.
(7)
(2) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
[pause].
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-
ward
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next track.
(2) Playback method indicator
Shows which playback method has been
selected.
Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the cur-
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-
ous track.
(3) Folder indicator
Shows the folder number and folder name cur-
rently playing.
Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward
Keep touching ꢂ or ꢁ to perform fast rewind
or forward.
(4) Track indicator
Shows the track number and track title currently
playing.
❒ You can also perform these operations by
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
(5) Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing.
❒ fast rewind is canceled when it reaches the
beginning of the first track on the disc.
(6) Play time indicator
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ In the case of MP3, there is no sound on fast
❒ If you select another folder or perform fast for-
ward/rewind during Folder Repeat, the
repeat play is cancelled. (You can perform
track search within that folder with Folder
repeart.)
rewind or forward.
(4) Using to stop playback
When you stop CD or MP3 disc playback by
touching ꢃ, that track number on the disc is
memorized enabling playback from that track
when you play the disc again.
❒ When Folder Repeat is selected, it is not
possible to play back a subfolder of that
folder.
❒ To play the disc again, touch ꢀ.
(9) Playing tracks in random order
(5) Selecting upper folder
Touching
switches between on and off the
Touching
to move the upper folder and
tracks are randomly played within selected repeat
range.
playback the first track on that folder. If the folder
contain no MP3 files, the contents of that folder is
shown.
(10) Scanning folders and tracks
Touching
turns the scan play on or off.
❒ If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
Scan play will be performed for the selected
repeat range.
can not be used.
(6) Switching mode between MP3 and music
CD (CD-DA) part
When playing discs with MP3 files and audio
❒ In default, the beginning of the first track of
each folder will be played for about 10 sec-
onds. When [Folder Repeat] is selected for
repeat play, the beginning of each track in the
selected folder will play for about 10 seconds.
When you find the desired track, touch
to turn scan play off.
data (CD-DA) such as CD EXTRA and MIXED-
MODE CDs, both types can be played only by
switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.
Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA part
and MP3 part.
❒ After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-
(7) Displaying text information on MP3 disc
Text information recorded on a MP3 disc can be
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.
displayed.
The next piece of information is displayed.
• Disc Title (disc title)*
• Track Title (track title)*
• Folder Title (folder name)
• File Name (file name)
• Artist Name (artist name)*
• Genre (genre)*
Notes on playing MP3 disc
❒ When playing discs with MP3 files and audio
data (CD-DA) such as CDEXTRA and MIXED-
MODE CDs, both types can be played only by
switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.
When playing back the CD-DA part, the opera-
tion is the same as for normal music CDs.
Likewise, when playing back the MP3 part, the
operation is the same as for MP3. When you
operate it, refer to the instruction for each
media.
• Release Year (release year)*
❒ The information marked with an asterisk (*)
only when ID3 tag has been encoded on MP3
files on the disc. If specific information of the
ID3 tag has not been encoded on MP3 files on
disc, the correspond item may be blank.
❒ If you have switched between playback of MP3
files and audio data (CDDA), playback starts
at the first track on the disc.
(8) Repeating play
Each touch of
changes the settings as fol-
❒ Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3
files. (For example, if folder 001 (ROOT) con-
tains no MP3 files, playback commences with
folder 002.)
lows:
• Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track
• Folder Repeat — Repeat the folder currently
playing
❒ If you select another track or perform fast for-
ward/rewind during Track Repeat, the
repeat play is cancelled.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When playing back files recorded as VBR
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be
correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse
operations are used.
Operating the DVD
• For safety reasons, “Video image”s cannot
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.
To view “Video image”s, you must stop in
a safe place and put on the parking brake
before setting your route (see page 18
Interlock for details).
❒ If you are using a folder that does not contain
an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but
you will not be able to see or play any files in
that folder.
❒ The maximum umber of characters are 32
characters including extension (.mp3). But
the navigation system incorporates the pro-
portional font. Therefore, the number of the
characters which you can display varies
according to which of each character.
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in DVD
drive of the navigation system. This section
describes operations for DVD-Video.
❒ If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop- Selecting [DVD] as the source
erly, an error message may be displayed.
1 Press the OPEN button and insert a disc
you want to play to disc loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
❒ If the disc is already set, touch the source
icon and then touch [DVD].
Page 99
❒ Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”
and “Playable discs” in the Hardware Manual
for more cautions about handling DVD-Video.
Screen configuration
(1)
(4)(6) (5) (7) (3) (8)
(9)
(2)
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(2) Sound output indicator
Shows which sound output setting has been
selected.
(3) Repeat range indicator
Shows which repeat range has been selected.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
(1) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
[pause].
(5) Subtitle language indicator
Shows what subtitle language has been selected.
(2) Touch: Skip the chapter forward or back-
ward
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next chap-
(6) Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
ter. Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the
current chapter. Touching again will skip to the
previous chapter.
(7) Audio language indicator
Shows what audio language have been selected.
(8) Viewing angle indicator
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.
Touch and hold: fast rewind or forward
Keep touching ꢂ or ꢁ to perform fast rewind
(9) Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
or forward. If you keep touching ꢂ or ꢁ for
five seconds, the icon ꢄ or ꢅ changes into
chapter.
or
. When this happens, fast rewind/ fast
forward continues even if you release ꢂ or
ꢁ. To resume playback at a desired point,
touch ꢀ.
Touch key operation
Playback screen (page1)
❒ You can also perform these operations by
(2)
(4)
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
(3) Using to stop playback
(4) Displaying the DVD menu
You can display the menu by touching [Menu] or
(2)
(1)
(3)
[Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touching
either of these keys again lets you start playback
from the location selected from the menu. For
details, refer to the instructions provided with the
disc.
(7)
(6)
(5)
Playback screen (page2)
(8)
(5) Displaying the DVD menu keypad
(6) Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-
motion playback)
Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.
(9)
(11)
Touching this during playback pauses the image
and each touch forwards a frame.
(12)
(14)
To return to normal playback, touch ꢀ.
❒ With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing frame-by-frame playback or slow motion
playback.
(10)
(13)
Menu screen
❒ There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
❒ Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.
(15)
(16)
(7) Switching next page of touch keys
(8) Repeating play
Each touch of the
changes the settings as
follows:
❒ With some discs, the icon
may be dis-
• Chapter Repeat — Repeat just the current
chapter
• Title Repeat — Repeat just the current title
played, that operation is not valid.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If you perform chapter (title) search, fast for-
ward/rewind, or slow motion playback, the
repeat play range changes to off.
(16) Using to decide the item
When you select a certain video item, play-
back starts from the selected item. When you
select the item with submenu, next menu
screen will appear.
(9) Changing the subtitle language (Multi-
subtitle)
Each time you touch [Subtitle] switches
❒ The way to display the menu differs
depending on the disc. For details, refer to
the instructions provided with disc.
between subtitle language.
(10) Changing the viewing angle (Multi-
angle)
Each time you touch [Angle] switches between
Searching for a desired scene,
starting playback from a speci-
fied time
viewing angle.
❒ During playback of a scene shot from multiple
angles, the angle icon
is displayed. Turn
You can search for a desired scene by specifying
a title or a chapter, and the time.
angle icon display on or off using “DVD-V
Setup” menu.
❒ Chapter search and time search are not possi-
ble when disc playback has been stopped.
(11) Changing audio language and audio sys-
tems (Multi-audio)
Each time you touch [Audio] switches between
1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch
[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]
(time).
audio language and audio system.
❒ Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If
navigation system’s optical digital outputs are
not connected, DTS audio can not be output,
so select an audio setting other than DTS.
❒ Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch
indicate the audio system recorded on the
DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may
not be with the same audio system as that
indicated.
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.
For titles, chapters
• To select 3, touch 3.
(12) Specifying the chapter you want to play
back or time to start playback by entering a
number
• To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.
• To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.
For time (time search)
➲ “Searching for a desired scene, starting play-
• To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],
[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.
• To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [Min] in order.
(13) The operation (such as resuming) stored
in the disc will be performed
When using a DVD that has a point recorded that
❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch
[Clear].
indicates where to return to, the DVD returns to
the specified point and begins play back from
that point.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
(14) Switching previous page of touch keys
(15) Selecting the DVD menu item
This starts playback from the selected scene.
❒ With discs featuring a menu, you can also
touch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and then
make selections from the displayed menu.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the numerical com-
mands
Operating the Radio (FM)
You can listen to the radio by using the navigation
system. This section describes operations for
Radio (FM).
You can use this function when you need to enter
a numerical command during DVD playback.
1 Touch [10Key search] and then touch
Selecting [FM] as the source
[10key Mode] (10key mode).
1 Touch the source icon and touch [FM].
Page 99
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.
For titles, chapters or 10key mode
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (7)
(6)
(5)
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(2) Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to
FM3.
(3) Preset number indicator
Shows what preset has been selected.
(4) Frequency indicator
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.
(5) Preset list display
Shows the preset list.
(6) LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
(7) STEREO indicator
Shows that the frequency selected is being
broadcast in stereo.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Tuning in strong signals
Touch key operation
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[FM] to select the radio (FM).
(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-
cies
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch keys
(5) Select a FM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM
band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.
(2)
(4)
❒ This function is convenient to prepare differ-
ent preset list for each band.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
(1)
(5) (3)
(1) Touch: Selecting a desired frequency
from the list
Touch to recall the preset frequency.
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-
cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-
cies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6 and once
stored there you can tune in to those frequencies
with a touch of the key.
❒ To register the frequency currently being
received to the preset list, touch and hold the
preset list.
1 Touch and hold [BSM].
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the frequency currently being
BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies will be stored under preset tuning
keys P1 — P6 in order of their signal strength.
❒ To cancel the storage process, touch
[Cancel].
received to the preset list. You can easily store up
to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with
the touch of a key.
❒ Touch to recall the preset frequency.
❒ Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 — P6.
❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM
bands can be stored in memory.
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning
To perform manual tuning, touch
Tuning in strong signals
or
briefly. The frequencies move up or
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for
good reception.
down step by step.
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, keep touching
1 Touch [Local].
or
for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found.
2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
❒ To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
❒ You can cancel seek tuning by touching either
3 Touch ꢆ or ꢇ to set the sensitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
or
briefly.
❒ If you keep touching
or
, you
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning
starts as soon as you release the keys.
The level [4] setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive weaker stations.
❒ You can also perform these operations by
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Radio (AM)
Touch key operation
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[AM] to select the radio (AM).
You can listen to the radio by using the navigation
system. This section describes operations for
Radio (AM).
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Selecting [AM] as the source
Touch keys
1 Touch the source icon and touch [AM].
Page 99
(2)
(4)
Screen configuration
Radio (AM)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2) (3)
(5)
(1) Selecting a desired frequency from the
list
Touch to recall the preset frequency.
❒ To register the frequency currently being
received to the preset list, touch and hold the
preset list.
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the frequency currently being
(4)
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
received to the preset list. You can easily store up
to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with
the touch of a key.
(2) Preset number indicator
Shows what preset has been selected.
❒ Touch to recall the preset frequency.
❒ Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory.
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning
(3) Frequency indicator
Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.
(4) Preset list display
Shows the preset list.
To perform manual tuning, touch
briefly. The frequencies move up or
down step by step.
or
(5) LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
❒ You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, keep touching
or
for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found.
❒ You can cancel seek tuning by touching either
or
briefly.
❒ If you keep touching
or
, you
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning
starts as soon as you release the keys.
❒ You can also perform seek tuning by keep
pressing the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Tuning in strong signals
(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-
cies
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-
cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-
cies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6 and once
stored there you can tune in to those frequencies
with the touch of a key.
1 Touch and hold [BSM].
BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast frequen-
cies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 —
P6 in order of their signal strength.
❒ To cancel the storage process, touch [Can-
cel].
❒ Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may
replace broadcast frequencies you have saved
using P1 — P6.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for
good reception.
1 Touch [Local].
2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
❒ To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
3 Touch ꢆ or ꢇ to set the sensitivity.
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.
Level: 1 — 2
The level [2] setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive weaker stations.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Using the AV Source (Music Library)
You can record tracks from a music CD to the
hard disk in the navigation system. The music
library function enables you to record music CDs
on the hard disk in the navigation system and
play them back in various methods. To use the
music library, start by recording sound sources
from the CD.
(4) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(5) Track indicator
Shows the track number and track title currently
playing.
(6) Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing.
(7) Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
Music Library Recording
track.
When you play back a music CD that is not
recorded on the navigation system, the system
automatically begins recording that CD to the
music library. This section describes cautions
and recording procedure.
(8) Track list
Shows tracks of the CD.
(9) Record status of tracks
: Recorded track
(Red): Track being recorded
❒ The music library can record up to 200 general
music CDs worth of music data. (This is just
an average number and varies depending on
the size of music data contained in the CDs.)
(Blue): Track is not recorded yet
❒ Track selection operation or special playback
functions such as random play are disabled
until recording finishes. To select tracks or
perform special playback functions, touch
[Stop] to stop recording.
CD recording screen (e.g. Auto mode)
(4) (1)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(3)
Title display
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
(9)
(8)
(5)
❒ A title information will be displayed when the
information is found in the Gracenote® Data-
base on the built-in hard disk drive.
(1) Recording mode indicator
Shows the current recording mode. Fractions
show number of recorded tracks total number of
tracks in the CD.
❒ When multiple options of title information is
find or no title information exists, [–] is dis-
played. A title may be displayed if you update
the title information manually after recording
has finished.
(2) Record progress indicator
Shows the progress of the recording. Fractions
show number of recorded tracks total number of
tracks in the CD.
❒ If no title information exists in the Gracenote®
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the
date when the track was recorded is entered
automatically. If you want to display the title
information, enter the title manually after
recording has finished.
(3) Record indicator
Shows the recording status.
that recording is in progress.
preparing recording.
(Red) indicates
(Blue) indicates
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Changing the title of the playlist or track ➞
3 Touch [REC].
Page 108
The track being played is recorded.
When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
end of the track.
❒ The title information displayed on the CD play-
back screen and the recording screen is syn-
chronized with the one edited in the music
library. If you edit the title information in the
music library, the title displayed on each
screen will change accordingly.
❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].
Recording only the first track of
a CD
❒ Title information can only be edited when one
or more tracks in a disc is recorded in the
music library.
You can record only the first track of the CD. This
mode is useful when you want to record only the
first tracks from multiple CD singles (or EPs) con-
secutively.
Recording all tracks in a CD
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].
❒ The REC Mode cannot be changed during
recording.
When you play back a CD that is not recorded, it
is automatically recorded in the music library
(hard disk drive).
❒ All tracks are automatically recorded (Auto)
2 Insert the CD you want to record.
Recording automatically stars for the first
track.
in the default setting.
➲ Switching the recording mode (REC Mode)
When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
end of the track.
1 Insert the CD that you want to record.
Recording automatically starts.
❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].
❒ To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].
When recording finishes, the system returns
to the normal playback screen of the CD in the
blank between current track and next track.
❒ If the CD is scratched or damaged, no data
can be recorded on that part. In such a
case, the track that falls on that part may
be skipped.
Stopping CD recording
You can stop recording while recording a CD.
(Recording can resume depending on the record-
ing mode.)
1 Touch [Stop].
When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:
Recording is paused, and the system starts
normal CD playback. To resume recording,
touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the
following cases:
Recording a CD manually
You can record only your favorite tracks in the
CD.
— When you switch to another source, and
then return to the CD source.
1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].
❒ The REC Mode cannot be changed during
recording.
— When you turn off the ignition switch of the
vehicle, and then restart the engine.
When REC Mode is [Manual]:
Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record
the track being played.
2 Play back the track you want to record.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About writing data to the hard disk
drive at low temperature
Notes on CD recording
❒ Operations on the navigation system may take
Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording
music to the music library may be disabled when
the navigation system detects abnormally low
temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will
become available once the temperature inside
the vehicle returns to normal.
more time during recording than normal.
❒ Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times
speed. You can listen to that sound during
recording.
❒ The data is recorded using a highly efficient
compression method, so the sound may
slightly differ from the original depending on
the sound source. Noise may be heard in
some cases, but this is not an malfunction.
When recording please pay attention to
these points;
• Pioneer does not compensate for contents that
cannot be recorded or any loss of recorded
data due to a malfunction or failure of the navi-
gation system.
❒ Recording is possible only with a CD that con-
tains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital audio
data.
• The data recorded on the navigation system
cannot be used without permission from its
right holder under copyright law except for per-
sonal entertainment.
❒ Recording (or copying) to the music library is
not possible from recording media (such as
CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is digitally
stored. This is due to the Serial Copy Manage-
ment System (SCMS) that was developed to
prevent second-generation or serial copies.
• Make sure to check the recording operation
before recording and check the recorded con-
tents after recording.
• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.
❒ Recording to the music library is not possible
from media (such as CD-Rs) in which MP3
files are stored.
About the data saved or recorded by the
customer
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-
tion system by the customer cannot be
extracted from the navigation system, and
those service cannot be accepted.
• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-
tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-
teed during repair or service. Lost data that
was saved or recorded by the customer is not
guaranteed.
❒ When you are recording a CD with no track
intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the
engine stops and the power turns off, the
sound may break in a track when the music
data is played back.
Notes for Hard disk drive
• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded
into the Music Library cannot be backed up
during repair or service.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for
lawful copying and you are advised to check care-
fully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-
right material such as films or music is unlawful
unless permitted by a legal exception or con-
sented to by the right owners.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title display
Music Library Play
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in
the hard disk drive in the source named music
library (LIBRARY).
Selecting [LIBRARY] as the
source
❒ If no title information exists in the Gracenote®
Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the
date when the track was recorded is entered
automatically. If you want to display the title
information, enter the title manually after
recording has finished.
1 Touch the source icon and touch
[LIBRARY].
Page 99
Page 122
Screen configuration
Relationship of groups, playlists, and
tracks
The music library is organized as follows with
Music Library (LIBRARY)
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
three levels:groups, playlists, and tracks.
(7)
There are four types of groups:
Album group ([Albums]):
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
Stores the recorded track data in its original
order. One playlist is automatically created when
a CD is recorded.
(2) Group name indicator
Shows the group currently playing.
Artist group ([Artists]):
(3) Playlist name indicator
Shows the playlist currently playing.
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by art-
ist names.
(4) Track name indicator
Shows the track currently playing.
Genre group ([Genres]):
Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by
genres.
(5) Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing.
My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):
Stores the playlists registered in My Favorites.
(6) Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
Maximum number you can register
(7) Track list and playlist
Shows the track list or the playlist currently play-
Group
Playlist
Tracks for a playlist
Albums
Artists
400
400
13
99
ing or temporary displayed.
400
400
99
Genres
My Favorites
5
If you try to record new one more than above, the
oldest playlist will be deleted.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Displaying the details information screen
Displays the information about the track or playl-
Touch key operation
ist displayed in blue on the track list. On the
details information, you can delete the track or
edit the track information.
Listening to a track recorded in the
Music Library
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[LIBRARY].
(7) Touch and hold: Register the track in My
Mix.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch keys
Page 119
(3)
(5) (4)
(8) Repeat play
Each touch of
changes the repeat range
as follows:
(3)
(2)
(7)
• Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track
• Playlist Repeat — Repeat just the current
playlist
(10)
• No display — Repeat the currently selected
group
(1)
(6) (8) (9)
❒ Repeat play may stop if you perform an opera-
tion that affects a track outside the repeating
range during track repeat play.
(1) Selecting a desired track from the list
Touch a desired track to play.
❒ Touching or switches to the next or previ-
❒ If you perform random play or scan play dur-
ing track repeat play, the repeating range
changes to Playlist Repeat.
ous page in the list.
(2) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
(9) Playing tracks in random order
The selected tracks in the repeated range are ran-
[pause].
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-
ward
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next track.
domly played.
❒ Random play may stop if you perform an oper-
ation that affects a track outside the repeating
range or perform repeat play or scan play dur-
ing track repeat play.
Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the cur-
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-
ous track.
❒ When the range of repeat play is Track
Repeat, if you perform random play, the
repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat.
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward
❒ You can also perform these operations with
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
Indicator
Implication
(4) Viewing upper contents
Tracks of all playlists in the group
are played in random order.
Random play
only
Touching
displays the contents of the
upper playlist or group.
Tracks in the selected playlist are
played in random order.
[Playlist
Repeat] and
Random play
❒ You cannot touch
on the group selec-
tion screen.
➲ “Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”
(10) Scan play
Scan play will be performed for the selected
repeat range.
(5) Displaying group selection screen
You can search a track from categories.
❒ When the range of repeat play is Track
Repeat, if you perform scan play, the repeat-
ing range changes to Playlist Repeat.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When you find the desired track, touch
Searching the playlist by artist
Select the playlist formed according to artists,
and play it back.
to turn scan play off.
❒ After track or playlist scanning is finished,
normal playback of the tracks will begin again.
1 Touch [Search].
The group selection screen appears.
Indicator
Implication
The beginning of the first tracks of
each playlist in the group is played
for about 10 seconds.
Scan only
2 Touch [Artists].
The Artist playlist appears.
The beginning of each track in the
selected playlist is played for
about 10 seconds.
[Playlist
Repeat] and
Scan play
3 Touch the artist name (Artist playlist) you
want to play back.
Searching a track from the playlist
Once tracks are recorded, the navigation system
categorizes them in a [group], and several types
of playlists are automatically created. A playlist is
a list that shows the playback order of tracks.
➲ “Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”
The first track in the selected playlist is played
back.
Searching for an album
Select the playlist formed according to albums,
and play it back.
Search a playlist by Genre
Select the playlist formed according to genres,
and play it back.
1 Touch [Search].
1 Touch [Search].
The group selection screen appears.
The group selection screen appears.
2 Touch [Albums].
2 Touch [Genres].
The genre playlist appears.
3 Touch the genre (genre playlist) you want
to play back.
3 Touch the album name (Album playlist)
you want to play back.
The first track in the selected playlist is played
back.
The first track in the selected playlist is dis-
played.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a playlist with a cus-
tomized order
Register tracks one by one
1 Play back the track you want to register.
You can register your favorite tracks as a playlist,
and play them back in desired order.
The My Favorites group (My Favorites) has two
types of playlists.
2 Touch
Favorites].
, then touch [Add to My
3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My
Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you
want to register the track.
My Mix playlist:
You can register the track being played in one
action.
4 Touch [Yes].
My Favorite 1-4 playlist:
You can register tracks from the detailed screen
The track is registered in the selected My
Favorite playlist.
information.
Registering multiple tracks at a time
Registering a track to the My Mix playl-
ist
You can register the track being played to the
1 Play back the playlist that contains the
tracks you want to register.
favorite playlist called [My Mix].
2 Touch
ists.
to display the list of playl-
, then touch [Add to My
1 Touch and hold [Memo] while playing
back the track you want to register.
The track being played is registered in the My
Mix playlist.
3 Touch
Favorites].
The item displayed in blue is the selected play-
list.
Registering tracks in the My Favorite 1-
4 playlists
You can register tracks in the favorite playlists
4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My
Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you
want to register the tracks.
from [My Favorite 1] to [My Favorite 4].
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch the tracks you want to register.
When you touch a track, a check mark
appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-
lect it, touch the track again.
Items that can be operated when edit-
ing a playlist
The items you can operate vary depending on the
playlist being played as shown below:
• ✓ : Operation possible
Touch to proceed to the next operation.
• – : Operation not possible
Operatable Item [Albums] [My Favor- See
group
ites] group
✓
✓*
P.122
P.123
P.123
P.123
P.124
P.124
P.125
P.119
Edit Title
Edit Pronounce
Edit Artist
Sort Playlist
Delete Playlist
Delete Track
Update
Add to My
Favorite
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓*
–
✓
–
✓
–
✓
• *: The [My Mix] group cannot be edited.
Items that can be operated when edit-
ing a track
The items you can operate vary depending on the
track being played as shown below:
• ✓ :Operation possible
Select All:
Selects all tracks in the playlist.
All Off:
Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.
• – :Operation not possible
6 Touch [Back].
Operatable Item [Albums] [My Favor- See
group
ites] group
✓
–
P.122
P.123
P.123
P.125
P.124
P.124
P.125
P.119
7 Touch [Yes].
Edit Title
The tracks are registered in the selected My
Favorite playlist.
✓
✓
✓
–
–
–
Edit Pronounce
Edit Artist
Edit Genre
Sort Track List
Delete Track
Update
❒ Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one
My Favorite playlist.
–
✓
✓
–
✓
✓
✓
Editing a playlist or tracks
You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in the
Music library.
✓
Add to My
Favorite
Only the playlists and tracks in the [Albums]
group and the [My Favorites] group can be
edited. [Pronounce] in the artist playlist can be
edited.
Switching to the edit mode
1 Touch the playlist in the [Albums] or [My
Favorites].
2 Touch the track you want to edit.
The item displayed in blue is the track cur-
rently playing.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch
.
Operating the playlist edit mode
The system enters the track edit mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Album playlist:
Page 122
All editing operations are possible. The edited
contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard
disk drive.
4 Touch [Back] to return the previous
screen.
My Mix playlist:
Only (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.
5 Touch
level.
to return to the previous
My Favorite playlist:
Only (1), (2), (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.
(1) Entering a desired playlist title
Page 122
(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as
a voice command for voice recognition
(3) Entering a desired artist name
(4) Sorting playback order of the playlists
➲ Changing playback order of the playlist or
The item displayed in blue is the selected play-
list.
(5) Deleting the playlist from the hard disk
drive
(6) Deleting the selected tracks from that
playlist
6 Touch
.
The system enters the playlist edit mode.
(7) Updating Album title information
Page 125
(8) Adding the selected tracks to My Favorite
❒ To return to the previous screen, touch
Page 119
[Back].
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the track edit mode
Changing the title of the playlist or
track
You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The
Album playlist:
All items can be edited except for (5). The edited
titles changed here are displayed on the screen.
contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard
disk drive.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit
mode.
(1)
(2)
Page 117
(3)
(4)
2 Touch [Title].
3 Touch [Yes].
(6)
(7)
(8)
The content to be changed in Step 4 can be
reflected to “voice command”.
No:
My Mix playlist, My Favorite playlist:
Proceeds to the next step without registering
it as a voice command.
Only (5), (6), (8) can be performed.
4 Enter a new character string, and then
touch [OK].
(5)
(6)
(8)
(1) Entering a desired track title
Page 122
(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as
a voice command for voice recognition
(3) Entering a desired artist name
(4) Changing genre
The system pronounces the character string
once, and the pronunciation confirmation
message appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the
change.
(5) Changing the order to play back tracks
No:
Page 123
Returns to the detailed information screen.
Repeat:
(6) Deleting this track
You can listen to the pronunciation again.
(7) Updating track title information
5 Touch [Yes].
Page 125
The changed character string is fixed and the
system returns to the previous screen.
(8) Adding the track to My Favorite
Page 119
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select an artist name from the list.
The artist name is changed to the one you
selected. In the playlist edit mode, touching
[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you
selected.
Changing the pronunciation of a playl-
ist name or track name
You can change the pronunciation of playlist or
track name. The pronunciation is used as a com-
mand for voice recognition.
❒ Only [Pronounce] can be edited for an artist
Sorting the playlists
The playback order of playlists in the group can
playlist.
❒ The navigation system recognizes only the
voice recognition character registered in the
current language. If you change the interface
language, the voice recognition character reg-
istered before you change the language will
not be recognized.
be changed.
❒ If there is only one playlist, the playback order
cannot be changed.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
Page 117
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit
mode.
2 Touch [Sort Playlists].
3 Touch the playlist that you want to
change the order for.
Page 117
2 Touch [Pronounce].
3 Enter a new character string, and then
touch [OK].
The system pronounces the character once,
and the pronunciation confirmation message
appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.
No:
Returns to the detailed information screen.
Repeat:
4 Touch
,
,
, or
to determine the
position you want to put.
You can listen to the pronunciation again.
4 Touch [Yes].
The changed character is fixed and the sys-
tem returns to the previous screen.
Renaming an artist name in the playlist
or track
You can rename the artist name in the playlist or
track.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit
mode.
Page 117
2 Touch [Artist].
:
3 Touch [Select from history List].
Moves playlists by page.
:
[Keyboard Input]:
Moves playlists one by one.
The character input screen appears, and you
can change the artist name with the keyboard.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch the selected playlist again.
Deleting a playlist
You can delete a playlist in the Album group. (You
The position of that playlist is fixed.
cannot delete playlists in other groups.)
6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the
❒ If you delete a playlist in an album group, all
tracks in the playlist are deleted from the hard
disk drive. (They are deleted from the My
Favorites group at the same time.)
playback order of other playlists.
7 Touch [ESC].
The new order is fixed, and the system returns
to the normal playback screen.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
Page 117
Sorting the tracks in the My Mix (My
Favorites) playlist
The playback order of tracks in the My Mix playlist
2 Touch [Delete This Playlists].
and the My favorites playlist can be changed.
3 Touch [Yes].
The playlist is deleted.
1 Enter the track edit mode.
Page 117
Deleting a track from the playlist
You can delete tracks from the playlist.
2 Touch [Sort Tracklists].
❒ If you delete a track in an album group, the
track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It is
deleted from the My Favorites group at the
same time.)
3 Touch the track that you want to change.
4 Touch
,
,
, or
to determine the
destination.
❒ If you delete the tracks in the My Mix playlist
or the My Favorite playlist, they are only
deleted from the playlist, and not from the
hard disk drive.
5 Touch the selected track again.
The destination is fixed.
6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the
playback order of other tracks.
1 Enter the playlist edit mode.
Page 117
7 Touch [ESC].
The new order is fixed, and the system returns
to the normal playback screen.
2 Touch [Delete Tracks].
3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.
When you touch a track, a check mark
appears indicating that it is selected. To dese-
lect it, touch the track again.
Touch ꢀ to proceed to the next operation.
Select All:
Selects all tracks in the playlist.
All Off:
Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playl-
ist.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Touch [Back].
Retrieving track title information
5 Touch [Yes].
1 Select the playlist in [Album] group, and
enter the track edit mode.
Changing the genre of a track
Page 117
1 Enter the track edit mode.
Page 117
2 Touch [Update Title].
Information search begins. When the title
information is obtaineded, the candidates
screen appears.
2 Select a genre from the list.
3 Select the corresponding track title from
the list.
The title information is updated to the one you
selected.
The disc updates the Gracenote® Data-
base for the Gracenote Music recognition
service on your navigation system will be
available in the future.
The genre is changed, and the system returns
to the previous screen.
Assigning another candidate for
title information
If the current title information is not desired title,
you can search for another title information from
Gracenote® Database in the hard disk drive man-
ually and assign another candidate.
If there were multiple options of title information,
you can select one title from them.
❒ Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote
is the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Retrieving album title information
1 Select the playlist in [Album] group, and
enter the playlist edit mode.
Page 117
2 Touch [Update Title].
Information search begins. When the title
information is obtaineded, the candidates
screen appears.
3 Select the desired album title from the
list.
The title information is updated to the one you
selected.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)
GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM
Operating to XM Satellite Radio
(1) (2)
(9)(3)
(5)
You can use the navigation system to control a
XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-
rately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the XM
tuner’s operation manuals. This section provides
information on XM operations with the navigation
system which differs from that described in the
XM tuner’s operation manual.
(7)
(8)
About the logo for channel name
Only the logo data that is contained in the naviga-
Selecting [XM] as the source
tion system can be displayed for each channel.
The logo of a newly established channel that is
not contained cannot be displayed. When no logo
can be displayed, the following substitute icon is
displayed.
1 Touch the source icon and touch [XM].
Page 99
Screen configuration
GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM
All Ch Mode
Substitute icon
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(1) (2) (3)(4)
(6)
(5)
(2) XM band indicator
Shows the XM band which has been selected.
(7)
(8)
(3) XM channel number indicator
Shows XM channel number the tuner is currently
tuned.
(4) XM station name indicator
Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner is
Category Mode
currently tuned.
(9)
(5) XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-
nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from
selected category in Category Mode.
Page 128
(6) XM channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) XM station name logo
Touch keys (GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM)
❒ The message “-ON THE AIR-“ disappears
if the navigation system cannot receive XM
tuner reception for some reason.
❒ If you use GEX-P910XM,the logo for chan-
nel name is not available.
(8) Detail information
Shows the detail information of the broadcast
(12)
channel currently being received.
(9) Category icon
Shows the category icon for the selected chan-
Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
used on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.
nel.
(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-
set
Touch to recall the preset channel.
Touch key operation
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[XM] to select the XM.
❒ In All Ch Mode, you can also recall the preset
channel by pressing the P.LIST (ꢀ/ꢁ) but-
ton.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
❒ In Category Mode, the screen shows cate-
gory search.
Touch keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM)
Page 1 (All Ch Mode)
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the channel currently being
broadcast to the preset list.
❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
(1)
bands can be stored in memory.
(2)
(5)
(4)
❒ If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM, the
channel number does not appear on the
touch key.
(3)
(6)
(2) Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down step by step.
Page 1 (Category Mode)
❒ If you keep touching
or
you
can skip broadcasting channels.
(11)
❒ You can also perform these operations by
(2)
(5)
(4)
using the TRK (ꢂ/ꢃ) button.
(3) Switching to the list display*
You can select a desired channel from the list dis-
(3)
(6)
play.
➲ Selecting a channel from the XM channel list
Page 2
(4) Switching the XM channel select mode
You can switch the mode between the two meth-
(7)
(8)
(9)
ods for selecting and listing the channel.
(10)
All Ch Mode :
You can select a channel from all channels when
you operate.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Mode :
You can select a channel within selected cate-
GEX-P910XM:
Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/
gory when you operate.
program title — Channel category
❒ This function is not available with GEX-
(5) Select a XM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM
P10XMT and GEX-P920XM.
band is displayed, XM 1, XM 2 or XM 3. This is
useful for switching the preset.
Display the Radio ID
(6) Switching the touch keys to next page
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.
(7) Memorizing the current song*
The song title and artist name being broadcast
1 Touch [10Key Direct].
will be memorized in My Mix. When the song that
matches the song information memorized in My
Mix is broadcast, you can tune the channel to the
one that is broadcasting that song.
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
❒ You can also display the Radio ID to select
[RADIO ID] from channel category in the
Category Mode.
(8) Setting the notification of the memorized
tracks*
You can set the song information memorized in
Selecting a channel from the XM
channel list display
My Mix. You can also delete the memorized song.
➲ Setting the notification of the memorized
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not only
by the channel name but also by the artist name
or song title.
(9) Selecting a XM channel directly
You can select a XM channel directly by entering
❒ The channel list shows all channels during
the All Ch Mode, and the channels included
in the selected category during the Category
Mode. To switch the channel mode, touch
[Mode].
the desired channel number.
Enter the channel number, touch [Enter], and
then touch [Back].
❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
❒ This function in not available with GEX-
1 Touch [List].
P900XM.
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of the [List] changes the settings
as follows:
(10) Switching the touch keys to previous
page
Detail information display — Ch Name List
(Channel name) — Song Title List (Song title)
— Artist Name List (Artist name)
(11) Switching the channel category
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-
gory.
2 Touch the desired channel that you want
to listen to.
(12) Switching the XM information
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display on the
bottom of the detail information as follows:
Touch
or to switch to the next page or
previous page.
GEX-P900XM:
Channel name — Artist name/feature — Song/
❒ During the Category Mode, touch [Up] or
[Down] to switch to another category.
program title — Information — Channel number
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the alert for each memorized
song
You can change the setting of the alert when the
track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-
able alert for each song.
Using the My Mix function
The My Mix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being
received. When the song that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being broad-
cast on a station other than the one you are
listening to, you will be alerted, and you can
switch the station to listen to that song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
You will receive alert for all items with a check
mark.
❒ A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the
2 Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the alert target.
song title and the artist name are memorized.
The check mark is removed, and the song title
is excluded from the alert target.
❒ If you touch that again, the check mark is
put and the song title is included in the
alert target.
Memorizing the song title and the artist
name of a song
The song title and artist name of the song you are
listening to can be memorized.
1 Touch and hold [Memo] for two seconds
or more.
Switching the alert setting
You can enable or disable the alert for all items
with a check mark. This function will be useful
when you want to turn the alert off temporarily
without changing the condition of check mark.
The song title and artist name of current song
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-
firmation message appears.
❒ The song title and artist name of up to 15
songs can be memorized. Trying to save
more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.
❒ The song title or the artist name cannot be
memorized when [--------] is displayed on
the title information.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
If the alert setting is [Alert Off],
is
displayed on the information plate.
❒ This function invalid for the channel 000.
❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.
When the memorized song is broadcast
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to switch
to that station, and you can listen to that track.
❒ If the memorized song is not selected in the
My Mix list, no notification will be provided
even when that song is broadcast.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks
from the song title list.
❒ Alert may not be provided depending on the
situation of the navigation system.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
➲ Setting the notification of the memorized
2 Touch and hold the track you want to
delete.
❒ If there is slight difference between the mem-
orized title and the title of the song being
broadcast, no notification will be provided
though they are the same song.
That track will be deleted from the alert target.
❒ To delete all songs that are memorized,
touch [Delete All].
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 A message will appear asking you to con-
Operating to the SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio
firm the deletion. Touch [OK].
You can use navigation system to control a SIR-
IUS satellite digital tuner, which is sold sepa-
rately. For details concerning operation, refer to
the SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS operations
with navigation system which differs from that
described in the SIRIUS tuner’s operation man-
ual.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to the memorized <Instant Traffic
& Weather> channel by directly calling it up with
the T button on the navigation unit. (Only one
station can be memorized.)
Memorize a <Instant Traffic &
Weather> channel
❒ The following functions are not available in
SIR-PNR1.
1 Tune into <Instant Traffic & Weather>
channel.
— Selecting team for game alert
— Displaying game information
— Using the song alert function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-
onds or more.
That <Instant Traffic & Weather> channel will
be memorized.
❒ The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem-
orized newly (although the channel 001 is
the default).
Selecting [SIRIUS] as the
source
1 Touch the source icon and touch [SIR-
IUS].
❒ Even if you use the SIRIUS satellite radio
tuner together, only one station can be
memorized. The station memorized after-
ward will overwrite the existing one.
Page 99
Screen configuration
Calling up the memorized <Instant
Traffic & Weather> channel
(1) (2)
(4) (3)
1 Press the T button.
❒ You can call up a <Instant Traffic &
Weather> channel even from a source
other than the XM source.
❒ To cancel the announcement, touch
[TRFC Off] on the screen or press the T
button again.
(5)
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(2) SIRIUS band indicator
Shows the SIRIUS band which has been
selected.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Page 1 (Category Mode)
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-
nels in All Ch Mode, and select a channel from
selected category in Category Mode.
(13)
Page 132
(4) SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows SIRIUS channel number the tuner is
tuned to.
Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
used on SIR-PNR1.
(5) Detail information
Shows the detail information of the broadcast
(1) Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-
set
channel currently being received.
Touch to recall the preset channel.
❒ The message “-ON THE AIR-” disappears if
the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS
tuner reception for some reason.
❒ In All Ch Mode, you can recall the preset
channel by pressing the P.LIST (ꢀ/ꢁ) but-
ton.
❒ In Category Mode, the screen displays cate-
Touch key operation
gory search.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.
Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations
You can register the channel currently being
broadcast to the preset list.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS
bands can be stored in memory.
Touch keys
(2) Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down step by step.
Page 1 (All Ch Mode)
❒ If you keep touching
or
you
can skip broadcasting channels.
(1)
❒ You can also perform these operations by
(2)
(5)
(4)
using the TRK (ꢂ/ꢃ) button.
(3) Switching the SIRIUS display
Each touch [DISP] of changes the display infor-
(3) (6)
mation.
Channel number — Channel name — Channel
category — Artist name/feature — Song/program
title — Composer
Page 2 (All Ch Mode)
(7)
(8)
❒ Touch and hold to switch ON/OFF the infor-
mation scroll.
(10)
(12)
(4) Switching the SIRIUS channel select
mode
You can switch the mode between the two meth-
(9)(11)
ods for selecting and listing the channel.
All Ch Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels when
you operate.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within selected cate-
Selecting team for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when games
involving your favorite teams are about to start. To
use this function you need in advance to set the
game alert to the teams.
gory when you operate.
(5) Select a SIRIUS band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS
band is displayed, SIRIUS 1, SIRIUS 2, or SIR-
IUS 3. This is useful for switching the preset.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
The League/Team Setting screen appears.
(6) Switching the touch keys to next page
(7) Selecting team for game alert*
You can register your favorite team.
2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the
league.
(8) Displaying game information*
You can display game information and changes
to the broadcast channel.
(9) Register the song as My Mix*
The song information currently broadcast will be
3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the
team.
memorized. When the song that matches the
memorized song information, you can tune the
channel to the one that is broadcasting that
song.
4 Touch [On/Off].
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.
(10) Setting the notification of the memo-
rized tracks*
You can set the memorized song information. You
can also delete the memorized song.
➲ Setting the notification of the memorized
5 Touch [Alert On].
❒ When the selected team is excluded from
the alert target, the team is displayed as
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected
when you have already made 12 team
selections, Full is displayed and additional
team selection is not possible. In this case,
first delete the team selection and then try
again.
(11) Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
The Channel number input screen appears. You
can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering
the desired channel number.
While the input number is displayed, touch
[Enter], and then touch [Back].
❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
Switching the Game Alert on or off
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items. This function will be useful when to turn
the alert off temporarily without changing the set-
ting of each selected team.
(12) Switching the touch keys to previous
page
(13) Switching the channel category
Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desired cate-
gory.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
The League/Team Setting screen appears.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
Memorizing the song title and the artist
name of a song
The song title and artist name of current song you
When the game involving team is
broadcast
are listening to can be memorized.
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to switch
to that station, and you can view to that game
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel
does not switch.
1 Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and [Song
Saved] is displayed.
❒ Alert may not be provided depending on the
❒ The song title and artist name of up to 10
tracks can be memorized. If you try to save
more than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.
❒ You cannot memorize the song without the
song title information or the artist name
information.
situation of the navigation system.
Displaying game information
(Game Info)
You can display the game information of the team
to which you have set an alert, and change to the
broadcast channel.
❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is
not displayed correctly.
❒ This function is unavailable if no team is
When the memorized song is broadcast
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to
switch to that station, and you can listen to that
track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does not
switch.
selected in the game alert function.
1 Touch [Game Info].
The game name and the broadcast channel
are also displayed.
❒ If the memorized song is not selected in the
song alert list, no notification will be provided
even when that track is broadcast.
2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view the
game score information which is regis-
tered.
❒ Notification may not be provided depending
❒ The game score will be updated automati-
cally.
on the situation of the navigation system.
➲ Setting the notification of the memorized
❒ Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel
that broadcasts the displayed game.
❒ If you have not made any team selections,
Not Set is displayed.
❒ If there is slight difference between the mem-
orized title and the title of the track being
broadcast, no notification will be provided
though they are the same song.
❒ When games involving your favorite teams
are not currently playing, No Game is dis-
played.
Setting the alert for each memorized
song
You can change the setting of the alert when the
track is broadcast again. You can enable or dis-
able alert for each song.
Using the My Mix function
The My Mix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being
received. When the track that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being broad-
cast on a station other than the one you are
listening to, you will be alerted, and you can
switch the station to listen to that song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
You will receive alert for all items with a check
mark.
❒ A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the
song title and the artist name are memorized.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to select the
song title that you want to exclude from
the alert target.
❒ Even if you use the XM satellite radio tuner
together, only one station can be memo-
rized. The station memorized afterward will
overwrite the existing one.
3 Touch [On/Off].
The song title displayed as [On] is the alert
target. When the song title is excluded from
the alert target, the song title is displayed as
[Off].
Calling up the memorized Traffic &
Weather channel
1 Press the T button.
❒ You can call up a Traffic & Weather channel
even from a source other than the SIRIUS
source.
4 Touch [Alert On].
Switching the alert on or off
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items.
❒ To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC
Off] on the screen or press the T button
again.
This function will be useful when you want to turn
the alert off temporarily without changing the
condition of each memorized song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks
from the song title list.
1 Touch [Memo Edit]
2 Touch [Delete This Song] when the track
you want to delete is displayed.
That track will be deleted from the alert target.
3 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch [Yes].
Using the Traffic & Weather pre-
set function
You can listen to the memorized Traffic &
Weather channel by directly calling it up with the
T button on the navigation system. (Only one sta-
tion can be memorized.)
Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel
1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather channel.
2 Press and hold the T button for two sec-
onds or more.
That Traffic & Weather channel will be memo-
rized.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)
When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to
the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-BUS,
such equipment can be operated from the navi-
gation system. This chapter describes the opera-
tion of the audio source that can be used when
the Pioneer audio equipment is connected. When
reading this chapter, please also refer to the oper-
ation manual of the AV equipment connected to
the navigation system.
Shows which repeat range has been selected.
(5) Track number indicator
Shows the track currently playing.
(6) Track title indicator*
Shows the track title currently playing.
(7) Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
track.
(8) Disc number display
Shows the disc number in multi-CD player.
Operating the Multi-CD Player
❒ The titles of the items marked with an asterisk
(*) will be displayed only when the CD TEXT
disc is used. When using a normal music CD,
they are displayed as [–].
You can use the navigation system to control a
multi-CD player, which is sold separately.
❒ Only those functions described in this manual
are available for multi-CD player. (Depending
on the multi-CD player, the function may be
invalid.)
Touch key operation
1 Touch the source icon and then touch [M-
CD] to select the multi-CD player.
Selecting [M-CD] as the source
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
1 Touch the source icon and touch [M-CD].
Touch keys
Page 99
(3) (4)
(5)
Screen configuration
(1)
(5)
(2)(3) (6)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(8)
(7)
(1)
(6)
(7)
❒ When the multi-CD player has performed the
preparatory operations, Ready is displayed.
(8)
❒ If the multi-CD player does not operate prop-
erly, an error message such as Error-XX may
be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player
owner’s manual.
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(2) Disc number indicator
Shows the disc currently playing.
❒ If there are no discs in the multi-CD player
magazine, No Disc is displayed.
(3) Disc title indicator*
Shows the disc title currently playing.
(4) Repeat range indicator
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1) Changing the disc in the magazine
(8) Scanning play
The first 10 seconds of each track of the current
(2) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
disc (or the first track of each disc) is played.
[pause].
Indicator
Implication
The beginning of the first tracks of
each disc is played for about 10
seconds.
[Scan] only
(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-
ward
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next track.
The beginning of each track in the
selected disc is played for about
10 seconds.
[Disc Repeat]
and [Scan]
Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the cur-
rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-
ous track.
❒ When you find the desired track (or disc)
touch to turn scan play off.
Touch and hold: fast backward or forward
Keep touching ꢂ or ꢁ to perform fast back-
❒ After track or disc scanning is finished, nor-
ward or forward.
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.
❒ You can also perform these operations by
using the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
(4) Playing back the previous disc
The disc previous to the currently played disc will
be played.
(5) Playing back the next disc
The disc next to the currently played disc will be
played.
(6) Repeating play
Each touch of
changes the settings as fol-
lows:
Track Repeat — Repeat just the current track
Disc Repeat — Repeat the current disc
❒ If you select other discs during repeat play,
the repeat play range setting will be canceled.
❒ If you perform track search or fast forward/
rewind during Track Repeat, the repeat play
range changes to Disc Repeat.
(7) Playing tracks in random order
Tracks will play in a random order within the pre-
viously selected repeat ranges.
Indicator
Implication
Tracks of all disc in the magazine
are played in random order.
[Random]
only
Tracks in the selected disc are
played in random order.
[Disc Repeat]
and [Random]
❒ If you perform random play during [Track
Repeat], the repeat play range changes to
[Disc Repeat].
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
song.
Operating the iPod®
You can control an iPod by combining the Pio-
neer iPod adapter (sold separately) to the naviga-
tion system. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owner’s manual of iPod adopter. This
section provides information on iPod operations
with the navigation system that differ from those
described in the owner’s manual of iPod adopter.
(8) Song title indicator
Shows the title of the current song.
(9) Playing Song Information
Shows the information and status of the current
song.
(10) Song title, Artist name, and Album title
indicator
When playing a song, Song title, Artist name, and
❒ When you use the iPod (sold separately) with
this Navigation System, Pioneer iPod adapter
is required.
Album title are displayed.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Touch key operation
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[iPod] to select the iPod.
Selecting [iPod] as the source
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
1 Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].
Page 99
Touch keys
(2)
(4)
(3)
Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(6)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(1) Playback and Pause
Touching ꢀ switches between [playback] and
(10)
(9)
[pause].
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
(2) Touch: Skip back or forward to another
song
Touching ꢁ skips to the start of the next song.
(2) Song number indicator
Shows the number of song playing in the
Touching ꢂ once skips to the start of the cur-
rent song. Touching again will skip to the previ-
ous song.
selected list.
(3) Repeat play indicator
Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current
Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind
song or all song on current list.
❒ You can also perform these operation with
(4) Shuffle play indicator
Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs
pressing the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
(3) Displaying the previous screen
Touch on the refine search or other screen to
of albums.
(5) Album title indicator
Shows the album title of the song.
return to the previous screen.
(6) Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the current song.
(7) Play time indicator
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Narrowing down the tracks to play back
You can narrow down the choices of songs to
❒ If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.
❒ When you select Artists, Albums or
Genres you can start a playback of all
songs in the selected list. To do this, keep
touching the list title.
play from five categories.
(5) Repeating play
Touch
repeatedly until the desired repeat
3 Touch a list title that you want to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the
desired song.
range appears in the display.
• Repeat One — Repeat just the current song
• Repeat All — Repeat all songs in the selected
list
❒ To return to the previous screen touch
.
(6) Shuffle play
This function shuffles songs or albums and plays
4 From the song list, touch the song you
want to play.
them in random order.
Each touch of
lows:
changes the settings as fol-
❒ To go to the next page of the list, touch
❒ To return to the previous page of the list,
.
• Shuffle Songs — Play back songs in random
order within the selected list
touch
.
• Shuffle Albums — Selected an album ran-
domly, and then play back all songs in that
album in order
Browsing for a song
The operations for controlling an iPod with this
navigation system are designed to be close to
iPod operation. This allows you to search and
play songs as you would with an iPod.
1 Touch [Search].
If you do nothing about 30 seconds after the
Step 1 to the Step 4 is done, actual screen
returns to the previous screen.
2 Touch one of the categories in which you
want to search for a song.
• Playlists (playlists)
• Artists (artists)
• Albums (albums)
• Songs (songs)
• Genres (genres)
The search screen is displayed.
The
icon on the left indicates that the item
is a [Playlist], and the
the item is a [Song].
icon indicates that
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Preset list display
Shows the preset list.
Operating the TV tuner
Touch key operation
• For safety reasons, visual images cannot
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.
To view visual images, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake
before setting your route (see page 18
Interlock for details).
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[TV] to select the TV tuner.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch keys
You can use the navigation system to control a TV
tuner, which is sold separately. For details con-
cerning operation, refer to the TV tuner’s opera-
tion manual. This section provides information on
TV operations with the navigation system that dif-
fer from those described in the TV tuner’s opera-
tion manual. When you attempt to watch visual
images while driving, the warning Viewing of
front seat video source while driving is
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1) Selecting channels from the list
The list lets you see the list of channels and
strictly prohibited. will appear on the screen.
select one of them to view.
Selecting [TV] as the source
❒ Touching or switches to the next or previ-
ous page in the list.
1 Touch the source icon and touch [TV].
Page 99
❒ You can register your favorite channels in the
list.
Page 142
Screen configuration
(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down step by step.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found.
❒ If you keep touching
or
you
can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning
starts as soon as you release the keys.
(5)
❒ You can also perform these operation by using
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
the TRK (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
(3) Storing the strongest broadcast stations
sequentially
Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity
(2) Band indicator
Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to.
(3) Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
can be registered automatically in the preset list.
➲ “Storing the strongest broadcast stations
(4) Channel indicator
Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Change band
Touching [Band] switches between [TV 1] and
[TV 2].
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 —
P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-
tions for later recall with a touch of the key.
1 When you find a station that you want to
store in memory keep touching a preset
tuning key P1 — P12.
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory. The next time you touch the same preset
tuning key P1 — P12 the station is recalled
from memory. To switch between P1 — P6
and P7 — P12, touch or . When the
touch panel keys are not displayed, you can
display them by touching the screen.
❒ Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV
bands can be stored in memory.
❒ You can also press the P.LIST (ꢂ/ꢃ) but-
ton to recall stations assigned to preset
tuning keys P1 — P12.
Storing the strongest broadcast
stations sequentially
1 Touch and hold [BSSM].
BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-
tions will be stored under preset tuning keys
P1 — P12 in order from the lowest channel
up.
❒ To cancel the storage process, touch
[Cancel].
❒ Storing broadcast stations with BSSM
may replace current broadcast stations
stored in preset memory.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)
Operating the AV Input source
(AV)
Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as
the source
1 Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]
or [EXT 2].
• For safety reasons, visual images cannot
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.
To view visual images, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake
before setting your route (see page 18
Interlock for details).
Page 99
Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
Selecting [AV INPUT] as the
source
1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].
(1) Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Touch the source icon and touch [AV
INPUT].
(2) External unit indicator
Displays any connected external units.
Page 99
Touch key operation
Operating the External Unit
(EXT)
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external
unit.
The term [external unit] refers to future Pioneer
devices that are not currently planned for, or
although devices are not fully controlled by this
navigation system, devices enable control of
basic functions. Two external units can be con-
trolled by this navigation system. When two exter-
nal units are connected, the navigation system
allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit
2. For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit operations
with navigation system that differ from those
described in the external unit’s operation man-
ual.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
Touch keys
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
❒ Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external
unit may not respond.)
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1) Sending an ꢂ, ꢃ, ꢀ, or ꢁ command
Touch to operate the external unit.
Operate the external unit by
using Function 1 — Function 4
❒ Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, some func-
tions may not be used until you touch and
hold the key.)
The external unit can be operated by transmitting
the operating commands set to Function 1 —
Function 4.
❒ The operating commands set to Function 1
— Function 4 vary depending on the external
unit.
(2) Sending a band command
Touch to send a band command to the external
unit.
1 Touch [Function].
❒ Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external
unit may not respond.)
2 Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].
(3) Sending a 1 key to 6 key command
➲ “Operate the external unit by using 1 key — 6
(4) Operate the external unit by using Func-
tion 1 to Function 4 key and Auto/Manual key
➲ “Operate the external unit by using Function 1
The operation command is transmitted to the
external unit.
➲ “Switching the automatic and manual func-
❒ Some functions may not be used until you
touch and hold the key.
❒ To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].
Operate the external unit by
using 1 key — 6 key
Switching the automatic and
manual function
The external unit can be operated by transmitting
the operating commands set to 1 key — 6 key.
You can turn automatic and manual function on
or off. You can switch between Auto and Manual
functions of the external unit connected. Initially,
this function is set to Auto.
1 Touch [1 — 6 ].
2 Touch desired key ([1 — 6 ]) to operate
the external unit.
❒ Operating commands set for Auto and Man-
ual operations vary depending on the external
unit connected.
1 Touch [Function].
2 Touch [Auto/Manual].
Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between
[Auto] and [Manual].
❒ To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].
❒ Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the
external unit may not respond.)
❒ To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].
❒ Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, some
functions may not be used until you touch
and hold the key.)
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the AUX input source
(AUX)
An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-
RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect
your navigation system to auxiliary equipment
featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to
the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.
Selecting [AUX] as the source
1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].
Page 155
2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].
Page 99
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16
Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual
Various settings are available with the audio
How to operate the Audio Set-
tings screen
source according to your audiovisual requests.
This chapter describes the methods of changing
the various settings and how to set of the LCD
1 Press the AV button.
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio
panel.
source screen (of any source).
AV SETTING overview
2 Touch [AV Settings].
The AV Settings screen appears.
The audio visual setting is divided into [Audio
Settings] and [System Settings].
3 Touch the item you want to change.
Audio Settings screen
4 Change Setting.
(E.g. Equalizer screen)
System Settings screen
❒ Touch [ESC] to return to the selected
source screen currently.
❒ Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settings
screen.
❒ When Pre Out (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in System Settings menu) is Full, the
Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub
Woofer.
Customizing the Audio Settings
Items
Using the equalizer
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer con-
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as
desired.
When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you
cannot select [Source Level].
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
izer curve settings will be memorized in
Custom1.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are six stored equalizer curves which you
can easily recall. Here is a list of the equalizer
curves:
• A Custom2 curve can be created common to
all sources. If you make adjustments when the
Custom2 curve is selected, the Custom2
curve will be updated.
Equalizer curve
Super Bass
Super Bass is a curve in which only lowrange is
boosted.
❒ The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized for
each of the source selected, but one curve is
shared for the following sources.
Powerful (Default)
Powerful is a curve in which lowrange and highrange
sounds are boosted.
In the built-in DVD drive, different curves can
be memorized for a DVD-Video and a CD (CD-
DA or MP3).
Natural
Natural is a curve in which lowrange and highrange
sounds are slightly boosted.
• AM and FM
• EXT 1 and EXT 2
Vocal
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange sounds, such
as the human vocal range, is boosted.
• AUX and AV INPUT
You can adjust the center frequency, level and
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
the Q (curve characteristics) of each band
Custom1
(Low/Mid/High).
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. A separate custom curve can be created.
Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves
that you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-
bandparametric equalizer.
Custom2
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all
audio source.
• Band:
1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings
menu.
You can select the band you want to adjust.
• Frequency:
You can select which frequency to be set as
2 Touch desired equalizer.
the center frequency.
• Level:
You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of the
selected band.
• Q:
You can select the details of the curve char-
acteristics. (The following figure shows the
characteristic image.)
❒ When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.
Adjusting equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired.
• A separate Custom1 curve can be created for
each source. If you make adjustments when a
curve Super Bass, Powerful, Natural,
Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected,the equal-
1 Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings
menu.
2 Touch [Customize].
The details setting screen appears.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select the equalizer band
to adjust.
Adjusting a position effect
You can select a listener position that you want to
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low — Mid — High
make as the center of sound effects.
1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings
menu.
4 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select the desired center
frequency.
Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)
Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)
High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)
2 Touch [Position].
3 Touch desired position.
5 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ increases or
decreases the level of the equalization band.
12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is
increased or decreased.
6 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select the desired [Q].
Touch ꢀ or ꢁ until the desired the curve char-
acteristics appears in the display.
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2
❒ To adjust other bands, repeat step 2 to step
6.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that pro-
vides an ideal listening environment in all occu-
pied seats.
1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in the Audio Settings
menu.
Setting the simulated sound
stage
The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP
(the subwoofer controller setting in System
Settings menu) is Sub.W, the Balance will
be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
You can select the desired effect from various
simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio or
Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a listener
positioning effect.
Setting a stage that fits your image
2 Touch ꢂ or ꢃ to adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
1 Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings
menu.
Each time you touch ꢂ or ꢃ moves the front/
rear speaker balance towards the front or the
rear.
2 Touch desired stage setting.
Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the
front/rear speaker balance moves from front
to rear.
❒ The [Living Room] setting that empha-
sizes midrange sound hardly has any
effect near the maximum volume level.
❒ When you set staging other than [Off], the
high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].
When the rear output setting is Rear SP
Sub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
1 Touch [Non Fading] in the Audio Settings
menu.
Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller
setting in System Settings menu) is Full,
you can select [Non Fading].
3 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to adjust left/right speaker
balance.
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
2 Touch [On] to turn non fading output on.
To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].
Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right.
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level
of the non fading.
Using subwoofer output
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output which can be turned on or off.
❒ When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output level,
and the phase of the subwoofer.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings
menu.
1 Touch [Loudness] in the Audio Settings
menu.
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in System Settings menu) is Full, you
cannot select [Sub Woofer].
2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.
To turn loudness off, touch [Off].
3 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select a desired level.
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ selects level in
the following order:
2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output on.
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].
Low — Mid — High
3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select the
phase of subwoofer output.
Using the high pass filter
❒ If subwoofer output sound is not clear with
[Normal], change it to [Reverse].
When you do not want low sounds from the sub-
woofer output frequency range to play from the
front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass fil-
ter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the
selected range are output from the front or rear
speakers.
4 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
Only frequencies lower than those in the
selected range are output from the subwoofer.
1 Touch [HPF] in the Audio Settings menu.
2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.
5 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level
of the subwoofer.
To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
3 Touch ꢀ or ꢁ to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch ꢀ or ꢁ selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Using non fading output
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
When the non fading output setting is on, the
audio signal does not pass through navigation
system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is
output through the RCA output.
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W,
the HPF function is effective for front speak-
ers only.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you change the acoustic field after you set it
Customizing the System Set-
tings Items
once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.
System Settings lets you perform system set up
of different settings for navigation system.
Adjusting source levels
Source Level (source level adjustment) lets you
adjust the volume level of each source to prevent
radical changes in volume when switching
between sources.
How to view and operate the
System Settings
❒ Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
1 Press the AV button.
level, which remains unchanged.
The Navigation screen changes to the Audio
source screen (of any source).
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with
the level of the source you wish to adjust.
2 Touch [AV Settings].
The AV Settings screen appears.
2 Touch [Source Level] in the Audio Set-
tings menu.
3 Touch [System Settings].
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vol-
ume.
+8 to –8 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Sources are set to same source level adjust-
ment volume automatically.
• CD and ROM (MP3)
• XM and SIRIUS
4 Touch the item you want to change.
The setting change screen appears, or the set-
ting changes by toggling it.
• EXT 1 and EXT 2
• AUX and AV INPUT
❒ Touch
or
to move to the
next or previous page.
5 Change Setting.
❒ Touch [ESC] to return to the selected
source screen.
❒ To return to the previous screen, touch
[Back].
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting assist subtitles on or off
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally
impaired. However, they are only displayed if they
are recorded on the DVD.
Setting up the built-in DVD
drive
You can change the preference for playing a DVD
on the built-in DVD drive.
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.
You can use this menu to change audio, subtitle,
parental lock, and other DVD settings.
Some changings or settings which you have set
here, may be invalid depending on the features of
the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s instruc-
tions.
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between
[On] and [Off].
❒ You can enter this menu while [DVD] is
selected as audio source.
Setting angle icon display
You can set to display the angle icon
on
❒ If you can enter this menu during DVD play-
back, playback will be stopped and return to
the first chapter.
scenes where the angle can be switched.
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
Setting the language
You can set each desired language for subtitle,
audio, and menu. If the selected language is
recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, menu are
displayed in that language.
2 Touch [Multi Angle].
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
[On] and [Off].
Setting the aspect ratio
1 Switch the audio source to [DVD].
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen dis-
play has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of
16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of
4:3. If you use regular rear display has a TV aspect
of 4:3, you can set the aspect radio suitable for
your rear display. (We recommend use this func-
tion only when you want to fit it to rear display.)
2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
3 Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-
guage] or [Menu Language].
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
❒ When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may
result in an unnatural picture.
4 Touch the desired language.
When you select [Others], a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
Page 159
2 Touch [TV Aspect].
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-
tings as follows:
❒ If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
❒ You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [Subtitle] or
[Audio] during playback.
• 16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
• Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
• Panscan — The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
➲ Changing the subtitle language during
➲ Changing audio language during play-
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When playing discs don’t have panscan
system, playback is with [Letter Box] even
if you select the [Panscan] setting. Con-
firm whether the disc package bears like
16 : 9 LB
❒ The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, included literature or on the
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a
recorded parental lock level, you cannot
use parental lock.
the
mark.
Setting the parental lock
❒ With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which nor-
mal playback resumes. For details, refer to
the disc’s instructions.
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock
to give an restriction so that children can not
watch a violent and adult oriented scenes. You
can set the parental lock level in steps as desired.
❒ If you forget the registered code number,
touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the
Step 3. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one.
❒ When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code num-
ber input indications may be displayed. In this
case, playback will begin when the correct
code number is input.
Changing the wide screen mode
Setting the code number and level
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code num-
ber, parental lock will not operate.
• For safety reasons, these functions are not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and put on the parking
brake before setting your route (see page
18 Interlock for details).
1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
2 Touch [Parental Level].
3 Touch 0 — 9 to input a four digit code
number.
1 Touch [Wide Mode] in the System Set-
tings menu.
The Wide Mode screen appears.
On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the
following items:
4 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom or Normal
Normal (normal):
5 Touch any of 1 — 8 to select the desired
level.
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no
sense of disparity since its proportions are the
same as that of the normal picture.
The parental lock level is set.
• Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
Full (full):
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV
picture (normal picture) without any omis-
sions.
• Level 7 — Level 2 — Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
• Level 1 — Playback of discs for children
only is possible
❒ If you want to change the parental level,
Just (just):
enter the registered code number in the
Step 3.
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center
and the amount of enlargement increases
horizontally toward the ends of the picture,
enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without
sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.
❒ We recommend to keep a record of your
code number in case you forget it.
Cinema (cinema):
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A picture is enlarged by the same proportion
as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction
and by an intermediate proportion between
Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal
for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-
ture) where captions lie outside the frame.
• Pioneer recommends the use of a camera
which outputs mirror reversed images,
otherwise screen image may appear
reversed.
Zoom (zoom):
❒ Immediately confirm whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R) from
another position.
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-
tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a
cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).
❒ Different settings can be memorized for
each video source.
❒ When the screen changes to full-screen rear
view camera image during normal driving,
switch to the opposite setting.
❒ When video is viewed in a wide screen
mode that does not match its original
aspect ratio, it may appear differently.
❒ Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
❒ Video will appear grainy when viewed in
Cinema or Zoom mode.
❒ Initially, this function is set to On.
1 Touch [Camera Input] in the System Set-
tings menu.
2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camera set-
ting on.
❒ Unless this setting is [On], you cannot
switch to Rear View mode.
❒ The navigation map and the rear view cam-
era picture is always Full.
3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate
setting for polarity.
Setting for rear view camera
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches
between the following polarity:
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC1). (For details,
consult your dealer.)
• Battery — When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
• GND — When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in the
REVERSE (R) position
Camera for backing up
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
camera image installed on your vehicle. When
the shift lever is in REVERSE (R) position, the
screen automatically switches to full-screen rear
view camera.
Setting the video input
You can switch the setting according to the con-
nected component.
❒ Select [Video] to watch video of a connected
Camera for Rear view mode
component as AV source.
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,
camera image is not resized to fit, but that a por-
tion of what is seen by the camera is not view-
able.
1 Touch [AV Input] in the System Settings
menu.
Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-
tings as follows:
• Off — No video component is connected
• Video — External video component
• EXT — Pioneer external unit connected
with RCA video cable
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When a Pioneer external unit is connected
with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When
the audio source is [EXT], the “Video
image” of the Pioneer external unit can be
displayed.
❒ Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended.
❒ Even when navigation voice guidance itself
cannot be attenuated or muted. If you want
to mute the navigation guidance voice
temporarily, use
screen.
on the navigation map
Switching the auxiliary setting
It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with navi-
gation system as the one of source. Activate the
auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment
connected to the navigation system.
Switching the muting/attenua-
tion level
You can select the muting/attenuation level of
[Mute Set]. This setting is also effected for the
mute signal has been received from the CELLU-
LAR MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.
❒ This menu is not available in the following
cases :
1 Touch [AUX Input] in the System Set-
tings menu.
Touching [AUX Input] switches between
[On] and [Off].
— Audio source is [OFF]
— During muting/attenuation
Switching the muting/attenua-
tion timing
— [5.1Ch Setup] is [On]
1 Touch [Mute Level] in the System Set-
tings menu.
You can select the audio source volume is muted
or attenuated what signal is output. This setting
is invalid for the mute signal has been received
from the CELLULAR MUTE lead connected to the
navigation unit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the
navigation system will mute or attenuate the
audio source volume, when the signal via CELLU-
LAR MUTE lead is output.)
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-
tings as follows:
• All — The volume becomes 0
• –20dB — The volume becomes 1/10
• –10dB — The volume becomes 1/3
❒ When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed
and no audio adjustments are possible
during the sound is turned off.
1 Touch [Mute Set] in the System Settings
menu.
❒ When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], no
audio adjustments, except volume control,
are possible during the sound is attenu-
ated.
Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-
tings as follows:
• Guide/Tel/VR — The volume is muted or
attenuated by the following condition
— When the navigation outputs the guidance
❒ Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended.
voice.
❒ Even when a mute signal has been
received from the CELLULAR MUTE lead
connected to the navigation unit, naviga-
tion voice guidance cannot be attenuated
or muted. If you want to mute the naviga-
tion guidance voice temporarily, use
on the navigation map screen.
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming
call).
— When the voice recognition mode is acti-
vated.
• Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenu-
ated by the following condition
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, incoming
call).
— When the voice recognition mode is acti-
vated.
• Off — The Volume does not change
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the voice output of the
navigation guidance
Setting the CD recording mode
You can set whether to start recording tracks
automatically when you plays a CD, or to manu-
ally trigger recording.
You can set the speaker to output the navigation
guidance and phone voice, etc.
1 Touch [REC Mode] in the System Set-
tings menu.
1 Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in the System Set-
tings menu.
Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-
tings as follows:
Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the
settings as follows:
• Auto — Records the tracks automatically
when a CD is played
• Manual — Lets you select the tracks you
want to record manually, and records them
• Single — Automatically records only the
first track of the CD
• Left SP — Uses only the front left speaker
• Right SP — Uses only the front right
speaker
• L+R SP — Uses both the front right and
left speakers
Switching the auto antenna set-
ting
Setting the rear output and sub-
woofer controller
If the blue lead of the navigation system is con-
nected to the auto antenna of the vehicle, select
either of the following settings.
The navigation system’s rear output can be used
for full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If
you switch Rear SP setting to the Sub.W, you
can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-
woofer without using an auxiliary amp.
• Radio — Extends the antenna only for the FM
or AM source. The antenna is stored when the
source is switched to another.
Initially, navigation system is set for rear fullrange
speaker connection. When rear output is con-
nected to fullrange speakers (when Rear SP set-
ting is Full), you can connect the RCA subwoofer
output (description on the label) to a subwoofer.
In this case, you can select whether to use the
subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)
built-in amp of the navigation system or the auxil-
iary amp or subwoofer.
• Power — Extends the antenna when the igni-
tion switch is turned on. The antenna is stored
when the ignition switch is turned off.
1 Touch [Auto ANT] in the System Set-
tings.
Touching [Auto ANT] switches between
[Radio] and [Power].
❒ Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch
will cause the antenna to automatically
retract.
❒ If you change the subwoofer controller [Rear
SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or [Non Fad-
ing] in the Audio Settings menu return to
the factory settings.
Setting the clock display on the
video image
❒ Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear
output are switched simultaneously in this
setting.
You can select whether to display the clock on
the video image screen without touch keys, such
as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV tuner.
❒ Rear SP can be set only when the source is
OFF.
1 Touch [Clock DISP] in the System Set-
tings menu.
Touching [Clock DISP] switches between
[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].
• All SCRN — The clock is overlaid on the
“Video image”
• Audio SCRN — The clock is not overlaid
on the “Video image”
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch [Rear SP] in the System Settings
menu.
2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Set-
tings menu.
If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned
[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn
[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disap-
pear. If you want to turn it [On] again, you
have to repeat the procedure from the Step1.
2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch the rear
output setting.
❒ When no subwoofer is connected to the
rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer
is connected to the rear speaker leads
directly, select Sub.W.
Other Functions
3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer
output or non fading output.
Selecting the video for “Rear
display”
❒ When the [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W,
[Preout] is invalid.
You can choose either to show the same image
as the front screen or to show the selected
source on the “Rear display”.
❒ Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn [Non Fading] or
[Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings
menu [On].
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[REAR SCREEN].
Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the
settings as follows:
• MIRROR — The video on the front screen
of the navigation unit is output to the “Rear
display”
• DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs
are output to the “Rear display”
Switching the 5.1ch setting
When the navigation system is combined with
the multi-channel processor system (sold sepa-
rately), you can use the multi-channel sound.
Enter the following setting when combining the
multi-channel processor system.
• AV — The video and sound of the AV
INPUT are output to the “Rear display”
❒ When MIRROR is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The TV tuner connected with AV-BUS, its
“Video image” cannot be output. (Connect
with TV tuner’s rear output to “Rear display”
directly.)
• DO NOT enter this setting before you con-
nect the multi-channel processor system.
(If this setting is entered, the Front RCA
will output maximum volume for the multi-
channel processor system.) Pioneer is not
responsible for any damage to the speaker
equipment caused by ignoring this warn-
ing.
— When selecting Rear View in the map dis-
play, nothing is displayed.
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear dis-
play”.
— There is no picture on “Rear display” while
[Picture Adjust] for [Back-Camera] is car-
ried out.
❒ This setting is possible only when the optical
cable connection box (supplied with the Multi-
channel processor) is connected to the navi-
gation system.
— The map screen navigation images output
to the “Rear display” differ from standard
NTSC format images. Therefore, their quality
will be inferior to the images that appear on
the front screen.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
[OFF] to turn source off.
❒ When DVD is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When the CD or MP3 disc is set in the built-
in DVD drive, nothing is output.
When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When AV is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the AV INPUT has them.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on [AV
Input] is [Video].
❒ You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the
source without a video and navigation map
display.
❒ The setting contents can be memorized
separately for the following screen and the
“Video image”.
— AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS
screen
— LIBRARY (Music Library) screen
— Built-in DVD drive
Operating the picture adjust-
ment
— TV image
— AV Input/EXT
— Rear view camera image
• For safety reasons, these functions are not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop
in a safe place and put on the parking
brake before setting your route (see page
18 Interlock for details).
— Navigation map and menu screen
❒ The picture adjustment may not be able to
be used with some rear view cameras.
❒ Because of the LCD screen characteris-
tics, you may not be able to adjust the
screen at low temperatures.
You can adjust for each source and rear view
camera.
2 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired
item.
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or
decreases the level of desired item.
1 Press the V button to display Picture
Adjust screen.
3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previous
screen.
Switching the Backlight On/Off
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without turn-
ing off the voice guidance.
• Brightness — Adjusts the black intensity
• Contrast — Adjusts the contrast
• Color — Adjusts the color saturation
• Hue — Adjusts the tone of color (red is
emphasized or green is emphasized)
• Dimmer — Adjusts the brightness of dis-
play
1 Press and hold the V button.
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns
off.
❒ Press the V button once again to turn on
the backlight, and the screen is displayed.
• Back-Camera — Shows the picture adjust-
ment display for the rear view camera
❒ Touching [Source] while adjusting the
rear view camera image returns you to the
previous screen.
❒ The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast
and Dimmer are stored separately when
your vehicle is headlight is on (daytime)
and when your vehicle’s headlight is off
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on the condition of the
vehicle’s headlight.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code Chart for DVD
Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
Language (code), input code
Language (code), input code
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Rumanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Spanish (es), 0519
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Sango (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Shinghalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Belorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Latin (la), 1201
Telugu (te), 2005
Lingala (ln), 1214
Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Laotian (lo), 1215
Thai (th), 2008
Lithusnian (lt), 1220
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tongan (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czach (cs), 0319
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Welsh (cy), 0325
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapu˜k (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Nepali (ne), 1405
Fiji (fj), 0610
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
(Afan) Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Irish (ga), 0701
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
To Ensure Safe Driving
1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice
operation.
• For safety reasons, Voice Help menu
(Voice Recog.Help) is not available while
your vehicle is in motion. To enable this
function, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting
your route.
2 Speak a command into the micro-
phone after the beep.
3 When the command is recognized, the
navigation system displays the
response message on the screen, and
pronounces it in some cases.
Basics of Voice Operation
Your Pioneer navigation system uses with the lat-
est in voice recognition technology. You can use
voice commands to operate many of its func-
tions. This chapter describes where you can use
voice commands, and also what commands the
system accepts.
4 As necessary, repeat Steps 3.
5 The requested operation will be car-
ried out.
Flow of voice operation
❒ The voice operation may not enable for a
minute after the navigation system has booted
up.
You can start voice operation any time even when
the map screen is displayed or audio is operated.
(Some operations are not available.) The basic
steps of voice operation are as follows.
❒ If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering
Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-
ing buttons can be used for operation:
VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:
Same function as VOICE icon.
VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:
Return to previous screen.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When you say [Voice Help], the navigation
system pronounces the displayed words that
can be vocalized.
To start voice operation
No sounds can be out put during
.
❒ If no voice icon is displayed, check to see
whether the microphone is properly con-
nected and turn the power on again.
1 Touch VOICE icon.
Navigation screen
❒ If there are too many items to list, voice help
menu can be switched by using
on the screen.
or
To cancel voice operation
You can cancel voice operation features at any
time by saying [Cancel]. After you cancel voice
operation, the map is displayed.
Audio screen
❒ If no command is made in the next 6 seconds,
voice recognition is canceled and the naviga-
tion system is on hold until the next operation.
Touch VOICE icon to reactivate voice opera-
tion.
❒ Depending on the operating state of the navi-
gation system, some commands displayed in
Voice Help may be unavailable. Available
commands are in white and unavailable com-
mands are in grey.
When using voice operation for the first
time
Until you are familiar with this system, it is rec-
ommended to stop the vehicle in a safe place and
refer to the commands displayed in the Voice
Help menu (a list of the words you can speak).
When your vehicle is parked with the parking
brake on, see the Voice Help menu and speak
voice command on that menu (except for some
case).
Voice Help menu
VOICE icon
When voice command is possible
When voice command is not accepted
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips for Voice Operation
An Example of Voice Operation
Search for POI in vicinity
For your voice commands to be correctly recog-
nized and interpreted, ensure that conditions are
suitable for recognition.
In this example, you want to search for the near-
est gas station and set as your destination.
Reduce the volume setting on your
vehicle audio system
❒ Give the following verbal commands after
switching to the navigation screen.
➲ The sound volume is automatically reduced
Page 165
Close the vehicle windows
1 Press the MAP button to display the navi-
gation map screen.
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.
2 Touch VOICE icon.
A list of commands for voice operation
appears. After the message, the beep indi-
cates that the system is ready to accept your
voice command. Say a command after this
beep.
Position the microphone carefully
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should be
fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the
driver.
Pause before giving a command
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to
fail.
3 Say “Destination”.
Pronounce your commands carefully
Speak slowly, deliberately and clearly.
❒ If the registered voice command and the
default voice command is the same, the regis-
tered voice command will take priority. In this
case, the default voice command will not
function. To use the default voice command,
change or delete the registered voice com-
mand that is identical to the default voice
command.
A message to prompt the next operation is
given.
4 Say “Vicinity Search”.
Say correspond commands for the function
you want to operate. Here, the selection
method of your destination is specified. When
you want to search the gas station nearest to
the current location, say “Vicinity Search”.
The message “Vicinity search. Please
request POI category.” appears, and the
navigation system pronounces that message.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Say “GAS Station”.
Search for the playlist
The message “Vicinity search. (gas sta-
tion)” appears.
In this example, you want to search for the playl-
ist and play that.
The map of the nearest gas station is shown.
1 Touch VOICE icon when the audio source
is “LIBRARY”.
2 Say “Music Search”.
3 Say desired group.
❒ For categories which can be used as the
voice commands, refer to “Category list for
vicinity search”.
➲ Refer to “Category list for vicinity search”
❒ If desired group is already selected, you
6 Touch VOICE icon.
can skip this step.
7 Say “Next” or “Previous” to select the
desired facilities.
4 Say the playlist name you want to play.
❒ You can switch the page by using
on the screen.
or
8 After confirming the location, say “Set As
Destination”.
❒ You can also search the track in the cur-
rent playlist with saying “Track Search”.
9 Touch VOICE icon.
The message “Starting route calculation.”
appears, and the navigation system pro-
nounces that message.
With the location shown on the map set as the
destination (or waypoint), the route calcula-
tion starts.
❒ If you say “Back”, return the previous
screen.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Voice Operation
This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation.
❒ During the voice operation, location screen (A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to “Location
Screen (A) and (B)” in the later section, and continue the voice operation.
❒ For <City Name>,<Street Name>,<house number> or <POI Name> shown on the following
chart, say their real name or number which you want to search for. For example, if the real POI
name is “Pioneer” and you want to operate “Go to <POI Name>”, say “Go to Pioneer”.
❒ For <Registered location’s pronounce > shown on the following chart, say the registered pro-
nounce. For example, if the registered pronounce in address book is “My office” and you want to
operate “Go to <Registered location’s pronounce >”, say “Go to My office”. In addition, this com-
mand can be used only with the selected language when you register.
❒ For <Album playlist name>, <Artist playlist name >, <Genre playlist name> , <Track name>
shown on the following chart, say their name in the music library (if you edited their pronounce, say
their pronounce.) . In addition, this command can be used only with the selected language when
you register.
❒ For <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “The list of categories
which you can say in “Vicinity Search” and say the desired category in that list.
❒ You can skip the commands with the mark (*). For example, in case search by Point of interest, the
system can recognize the command even if you say “POI” without saying “Destination”.
❒ If some candidates have been found, the candidate list appears. Select the one from the list and pro-
ceed to next step.
❒ The voice operation related the telephone is available only when the condition under the hands-free
phoning feature of this system can be operated and unavailable during a call.
Voice commands related to navigation
❒ Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen.
Search by address
Destination* ➞ Address ➞ <City Name> ➞ <Street Name> ➞ <House number> ➞ Location Screen (A)
Notes:
• Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.
• When you say the street name, say the street type together <e.g. XXXX street, xxxx avenue, xxxx road, xxxxx boule-
vard, etc. >
• Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.
• If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area” so that your destination can be set to the
main point of that city or street.
Search by Points of interest
Destination* ➞ POI ➞ <POI Name> ➞ Location Screen (A)
Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Go To <POI Name> ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.
Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Waypoint <POI name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Call <POI name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to call that facility. Only when the cellular phone fea-
turing Bluetooth technology is available.
Destination* ➞ POI ➞ Display <POI name> ➞ Display the map of that facility’s surroundings.
Search by telephone number
Destination* ➞ Telephone Number ➞ Location Screen (A) (If multiple facilities exist with the same phone number,
the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)
Note:
You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search by entry on the address book
Destination* ➞ Address Book ➞ <Registered location name> ➞ Location Screen (A)
<Registered location name> ➞ Location Screen (A)
Destination* ➞ Go To <Registered location name> ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route cal-
culation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.
Destination* ➞ Waypoint <Registered location name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Making phone call to entry on the address book
Destination* ➞ Call <Registered location name> ➞ Touch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone
number is registered in the entry.)
Displaying the map of the entry on the address book
Destination* ➞ Display <Registered location name> ➞ Display the map of surroundings on that facility.
Search the facilities in vicinity
Destination* ➞ Vicinity Search ➞ [Category Name]/[Sub Category Name] ➞ Location Screen (B)
Displaying the destination history
Destination* ➞ Destination History ➞ Display the Destination History screen.
Setting the route to your home
Destination* ➞ Return Home ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no
route, the system starts the route calculation.)
Making phone call to your home
Destination*
home.)
➞
Call Home
➞
Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your
Setting your home to waypoint
Destination* ➞ Waypoint Home ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if
you have set the destination.)
Display the map of surroundings on your home
Destination* ➞ Display Home ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your home.
Display the map of surroundings on your destination
Destination* ➞ Display Destination ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your destination.
Set the map location as your destination
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Desti-
nation ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts
the route calculation.
Set the map location as your waypoint
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Way-
point ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Registering the map location to the address book
Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Registration
➞ The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.
Operating the navigation map scale
Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX <kilo> meter(s) Scale <25m, 50m, 100m, 200m, 500m, 1km, 2km, 5km,
10km, 20km, 50km, 100km, 200km, 500km, 1000km, 2000km> ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected scale.
(This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.)
Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX mile/yards Scale <0.02miles, 0.05miles, 0.1miles, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,
0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles, 500miles, 1000miles, 25yards,
50yards, 100yards> ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected scale. (This function is not available in vehicle
dynamics mode.)
Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ Zoom Out/Zoom In ➞ Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.
Operating the view mode
Map Operation* ➞ Change View Mode* ➞ Map View, Driver’s View, Twin Map View, Route View, Guide View, Rear
View, Vehicle Dynamics ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected view mode.
Operating the map orientation
Map Operation* ➞ Heading Up, North Up ➞ Map orientation will be changed.
Recalculating the route
Route Options* ➞ Change Route* ➞ Rerouting, Use Main Road, Avoid Main Road, Use Freeway, Avoid Freeway,
Use Ferry, Avoid Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Road ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recalculate.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the current route
Route Options* ➞ Route Profile ➞ Displaying the route profile screen.
Route Options* ➞ Next Guidance ➞ You can hear the information of next guidance point.
Canceling the route
Route Options* ➞ Cancel Route ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.
Route Options
*
➞
Cancel Waypoint
➞
If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next waypoint.
Checking the traffic list
Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic Event List ➞ Displaying the traffic event list.
Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic On Route List ➞ Displaying the traffic event list on your route.
Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic Flow List ➞ Displaying the traffic flow list.
Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology
Call* ➞ Telephone book ➞ Displaying the telephone book. (Unavailable while the vehicle is running.)
Call* ➞ Call Registered Point ➞ (registered location name) ➞ If the registered location has telephone number data,
touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.
Call* ➞ Redial ➞ Touch VOICE icon to redial.
Call* ➞ Call Phone Number ➞ Say the number you want to call. ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial.
Call* ➞ Received Call ➞ Displaying the received call list.
Call* ➞ Call Favorite 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial.
Erase the tracking
Other Operation* ➞ Erase Tracks ➞ Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.
Viewing the Emargency Info screen
Other Operation* ➞ Emergency Information ➞ Displaying the Emergency info screen.
Turning on or off the Overlay POI
Other Operation* ➞ Display Overlay POI ➞ Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.
Other Operation* ➞ Hide Overlay POI ➞ Turn off Overlay POI.
Voice commands related to AV operation
❒ Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source (except for “Com-
mon AV commands”).
Common AV commands
AV Operation* ➞ Change Display ➞ Navigation Screen ➞ Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.
AV Operation* ➞ Change Display ➞ AV screen ➞ Switching to the Audio source screen.
AV Operation* ➞ Source Off ➞ Turning the Audio source off.
AV Operation* ➞ Traffic Channel ➞ Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SIRIUS satellite radio tuner.
AV Operation* ➞ Change Source ➞ CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, SIRIUS, iPod, XM, EXTERNAL 1,
EXTERNAL 2, Music Library ➞ Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)
Operation for Multi-CD
AV Operation* ➞ Disc 1 to 12 ➞ Selecting the disc for playback.
Operation for FM
AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.
Operation for AM
AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.
Operation for TV
AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 12 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner
AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.
AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.
AV Operation* ➞ Category Mode ➞ Switching to the Category mode.
AV Operation* ➞ All Channel Mode ➞ Switching to the All Channel mode.
AV Operation* ➞ Memo ➞ Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to MyMix.
Operation for CD
AV Operation* ➞ Change Media ➞ Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.
Operation for Music Library
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Album ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist.
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 1)
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Artist ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist.
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 1)
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Genre ➞ <Genre playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist.
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Genre playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 1)
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favorites ➞ My Favorites 1, My Favorites 2, My Favorites 3, My Favorites 4,
MyMix ➞ Playback selected playlist.
AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favorites 1, My Favorites 2, My Favorites 3, My Favorites 4, MyMix ➞ Play-
back selected playlist.
AV Operation* ➞ Track Search ➞ <Track name> ➞ Playback the selected track. (Note 2)
(Note 1):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.
(Note 2):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.
After checking traffic information manually
If the traffic congestion is found after checking the traffic information manually, “Do you want to
reroute?” appears on screen. In this time, you can say voice commands to operate.
Do you want to reroute?
Options:
Yes:
The route will be recalculated by touching VOICE icon.
No:
The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears.
Location screen (A) and (B)
Location screen (A)
The following commands can be vocalized:
Set As Destination
If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system
starts the route calculation.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set as Waypoint
Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.
Display Map
Displaying the map of surroundings on that location.
Call here
If the location has telephone number data, touch VOICE icon to make a call to the location.
Location screen (B)
The following commands can be vocalized:
Set As Destination
Same as above.
Set As Waypoint
Same as above.
Display Map
Same as above.
Next
Seeing the next POI.
Previous
Seeing the previous POI.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Voice Commands
The navigation system also can recognize the words in the following list.
Other voice commands for navigation operation
Preferential voice command
Back
Other voice command
Return, Previous
Escape, Skip
Cancel
Current Location
Voice Help
My Location
Recognition Help, Help
Next, Following
Next Page
Previous Page
Basic Operation
Set As Destination
Set As Waypoint
Registration
Back Page
Basics, Basic
Set, Go
Set Waypoint, Waypoint
Register, Store
Destination
Go To, Search
POI
Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest
Addresses, Address Search
Surrounding, Around
Telephone, Phone Number
Registered Points, My Addresses
Search History, Destination List
Vicinity, Search Around
Go Home, Drive Home
Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint
Phone Home, Dial Home
Show Home
Address
Area
Telephone Number
Address Book
Destination History
Vicinity Search
Return Home
Waypoint Home
Call Home
Display Home
Display Destination
Map Operation
Zoom Out
Destination Map, Show Destination
Map, Map Option
Out, Higher
Zoom In
In, Lower
Change Scale
Scale, Zoom
25 meters Scale
50 meters Scale
100 meters Scale
200 meters Scale
500 meters Scale
1 kilometer Scale
2 kilometers Scale
5 kilometers Scale
10 kilometers Scale
20 kilometers Scale
50 kilometers Scale
100 kilometers Scale
200 kilometers Scale
500 kilometers Scale
1000 kilometers Scale
2000 kilometers Scale
0.02 miles Scale
0.05 miles Scale
25meters
50meters
100meters
200meters
500meters
1kilometer
2kilometers
5kilometers
10kilometers
20kilometers
50kilometers
100kilometers
200kilometers
500kilometers
1000kilometers
2000kilometers
0.02miles
0.05miles
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preferential voice command
0.1 miles Scale
0.25 miles Scale
0.5 miles Scale
0.75 miles Scale
1 mile Scale
Other voice command
0.1miles
0.25miles
0.5miles
0.75miles
1mile
2.5 miles Scale
5 miles Scale
10 miles Scale
25 miles Scale
50 miles Scale
100 miles Scale
250 miles Scale
500 miles Scale
1000 miles Scale
25 yards Scale
50 yards Scale
100 yards Scale
Change View Mode
Map View
2.5miles
5miles
10miles
25miles
50miles
100miles
250miles
500miles
1000miles
25yards
50yards
100yards
View Mode, Change View
Normal Map, Flat Map
Driver, 3D
Driver’s View
Twin Map View
Route View
Twin, Split
Turns, Turn View
Guide, Arrow
Guide View
Rear View
Rear, Back View
Dynamics, Meters
North, Compass
Head Up, Car Up
Change Route Options
Edit Route
Vehicle Dynamics
North Up
Heading Up
Route Options
Change Route
Rerouting
New Route, Update Route
Main Roads, Take Main Roads
Freeways, Highways
Ferry, Ferries
Use Main Road
Use Freeway
Use Ferry
Use Toll Road
Avoid Freeway
Avoid Ferry
Toll Road, Payroad
Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate
Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries
Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay
Delete Route, Cancel Guidance
Profile
Avoid Toll Road
Cancel Route
Route Profile
Cancel Waypoint
Next Guidance
Traffic Information
Traffic Events List
Traffic On Route List
Traffic Flow List
Call
Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint
Following Guidance, Guidance After This
Traffic, View Traffic Info
Event List, Events
On Route List, Route List
Flow List, Flows
Dial, Ring
Call Registered Point
Call Phone Number
Telephone Book
Redial
Call Address Book, Call Registered
Call By Number, Call Number
Tel Book, Phone Book
Call Again, Phone Again
Call 1, Phone 1
Call Favorite 1
Call Favorite 2
Call 2, Phone 2
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preferential voice command
Call Favorite 3
Call Favorite 4
Call Favorite 5
Received Call
Other Operation
Erase Tracks
Other voice command
Call 3, Phone 3
Call 4, Phone 4
Call 5, Phone 5
Received, Who Called
Other, Others
Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks
Show Overlay POI, Display POIs
Set, Go
Display Overlay POI
Set As Destination
Set As Waypoint
Yes
Set Waypoint, Waypoint
OK, I Agree
No
Not OK, I Disagree
Other voice commands for AV operation
Preferential voice command
AV Input
Other voice command
Video Input
MCD
CD Changer
Rock/Pop
Rock, Pop
Hip-Hop/Rap
Soul/Urban
Hip-Hop, Rap
Soul, Urban
Category list for visinity search
❒ If you say the category name (category title), the system search for vicinity POIs in that category
without taking the chain into consideration.
Category name: Gas Station
76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK, CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON-MOBIL, FINA, GETTY, GULF, PETRO-
CANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SUNOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others
Category name: Bank & ATM
B B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL, BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA, BANK ONE,
CHASE MANHATTAN BANK, CIBC BANK, CITIBANK, FIRST UNION NATIONAL BANK, FLEET BANK, HSBC BANK
USA, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAURENTIAN BANK OF CANADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONAL BANK OF CAN-
ADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK, ROYAL BANK OF CANADA, SOUTHTRUST BANK, SUN TRUST BANK, TOR-
ONTO DOMINION BANK, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, US BANK, WACHOVIA BANK, WASHINGTON MUTUAL,
WELLS FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others
Category name: Restaurant
American, Asian, Barbecue, Cafe & Espresso, Chinese, Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, Indian, Italian, Jap-
anese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood, Steak House, Thai, Restaurant-Others
Category name: Fast Food Chains
ARBY'S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROBBINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM'S ICE CREAM & DAIRY,
BURGER KING, CARL'S JR., CARVEL ICE CREAM BAKERY, CHURCH'S CHICKEN, COLD STONE CREAMERY, DAIRY
QUEEN, HAAGEN-DAZS ICE CREAM, HARDEE'S, HARVEY'S, IN-N-OUT BURGER, JACK IN THE BOX, K F C, LONG
JOHN SILVER'S, MC DONALD'S, PANDA EXPRESS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO'S, SECOND CUP, SONIC, STARBUCK'S COF-
FEE, SUBWAY SANDWICHES & SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN'S, TCBY, TIM HORTON'S, TJ CINNAMONS,
TOGO'S, WENDY'S
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category name: Restaurant Chains
A & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE'S, BENNIGAN'S, BONANZA, CHILI'S GRILL & BAR, CHUCK E CHEESE
PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER, COCO'S, DOMINO'S PIZZA, FAZOLI'S, GODFATHER'S PIZZA, GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY
STEAK HSE, IHOP RESTAURANT, KELSEY'S, LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA, LONE STAR STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CAL-
LENDER, OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE, PAPA JOHN'S PIZZA, PASTA CONNECTION, PERKINS FAMILY RESTAURANT,
PIZZA HUT, PONDEROSA STEAK HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUND TABLE PIZZA, RUBY TUESDAY, SHAKEY'S
PIZZA, SIZZLER, SWISS CHALET, TGI FRIDAY'S
Category name: Supermarkets
ACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, ATLANTIC & PACIFIC TEA CO, BI-LO, CUB FOODS, FOOD LION, GIANT, GIANT EAGLE,
H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL, KROGER, MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLY WIGGLY, PUBLIX, RALEY'S, RALPH'S,
SAFEWAY, SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW'S SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP, STOP N GO, TOPS FRIENDLY MARKET, VON'S,
WHOLE FOODS, WINN-DIXIE, Supermarkets-Others
Category name: Automotive
AAA, RV Facility, Automobile Club, Parking, Car Parts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash
Category name: Retailer Chains
BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTOR 2-U, KMART, KOHL'S, ROSS, SAM'S CLUB, STEIN MART, T J
MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retailer Chains-Others
Category name: Hotel
AMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BEST WESTERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, DAYS INN, DOUBLE
TREE, ECONO LODGE, EMBASSY SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN, HILTON, HILTON GARDEN INN, HOLI-
DAY INN, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARD JOHNSON, HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN, MARRIOTT, MOTEL
6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION, RAMADA INN, RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS, SCOTTISH INN, SHERATON,
STUDIO 6, SUPER 8, TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN, Hotel-Others
Category name: Car Dealer
ACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVROLET, CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA, HYUNDAI,
INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA, LAND ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MERCEDES-BENZ, MITSUBISHI,
NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE, PONTIAC, PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SUZUKI, TOYOTA, VOLKSWAGEN,
VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others
Category name: Rental and Other Services
Rental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners
Category name: Electronics Retailer
BEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, FRY'S ELECTRONICS, GOOD GUYS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS, Electronics
Retailer-Others
Category name: Groceries
Liquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, Delicatessen, Groceries-Others
Category name: Shopping
Shopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, Music Store, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement, Glass-
ware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes & Bags, Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop, Shopping-Others
Category name: Entertainment
Stadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, Night Club, Theater & Play, Winery, Pub
Category name: Leisure
Museum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, Fair Ground, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping & Hiking, Ski
Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool & Tennis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist Attraction, Park & Rec-
reation
Category name: Public Service & Facility
Police Station, Government Office, Post Office, Court House, Convention Center, City Center, Library
Category name: Transportation
Airline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station, Rest Area
Category name: Medical
Doctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Service, Hospital, Pharmacy
Category name: School
University & College, Nursery School, Elementary School, Junior High School, High School, Vocational School
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings
You can return settings or recorded contents to the default or factory settings. There are four methods
to clear user data, and the situations and the cleared content are different for each method. For the
content to be cleared in each methods, see the list presented later.
❒ The map data and the system data are not cleared from the hard disk drive by any clearing method.
Method 1: RESET button
Pressing the RESET button clears almost all settings of the audio function.
The system becomes the same state when the battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of
the navigation system is disconnected.
Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]
Clears some items in the [Map] menu and in the [Settings] menu.
Method 3: [Reset] on start-up
Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk drive.
Method 4: [Clear user information from hard disk] on start-up
Clears all user data (including Music Library) stored in the hard disk drive.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting items to be deleted
The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table
return to the default or factory settings. The items not listed below will be retained.
However, if you carry out [Clear user information from hard disk] all the settings related to the
navigation function including the item not listed below are deleted.
— : The setting will be retained.
✓ : The setting content will be cleared and returns to the default or factory settings.
1
1
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
Method 4
Navigation functions
Map function View mode and scale setting on the
map
—
—
✓
✓
Direction of the map
Last cursor position on the map screen
Route Setting Current route
Guidance state of the current route
Vehicle position information
Route conditions
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Destination
menu
Auto full-in function for cities and
streets
—
Point registered in Address Book
—
—
—
—
—
✓
✓
Sorting order selected in Address
Book
✓
Information
menu
Sorting order selected in Traffic
Events, Traffic On Route, and Traffic
Flow
—
—
✓
✓
Traffic Settings
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Phone Settings (Phone Menu)
Telephone Book, Dial Favorite,
Dialed Numbers, Received Calls
(Phone Menu)
—
Stock Info
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
My Favorites
Emergency Info
Map menu
Short-Cut Selection, View Mode
✓
Displayed Info, Overlay POI, Day/
Night Display, AV Guide Mode,
Road Color
✓
Settings
menu
Language (Regional settings), Time
(Regional settings), Installation
Angle Setup (Hardware), Defined
Locations, Modify Current Location,
Background Picture Setting
—
—
✓
✓
Items other than above
—
—
✓
✓
✓
[Learning Status] ([Hardware]),
[3D Calibration Status] ([Hardware])
—
—
—
Vehicle
Dynamics
Right and left gauge type, Adjust Look
—
✓
—
—
✓
✓
Audio Set-
tings
All items
—
—
System Set- Mute Set
tings
✓
—
—
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
Clock DISP
REC Mode
✓
✓
Other item
—
—
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
Method 4
Audio functions
Music Library Repeat, Random, Scan, and Pause set-
(LIBRARY)
✓
—
✓
✓
tings
Track data
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
✓
✓
Play list
Last playback position
Alert on/off for My Mix
Preset memory
Preset memory
Preset memory
Rear Screen setting
✓
XM
FM
AM
TV
✓
✓
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
✓
✓
✓
REAR
SCREEN
✓
Others
Picture Adjust
Display Angle
✓
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
If system errors frequently occur Returning the navigation system
completely to the initial state
to the navigation system turns off, an inappropri-
If system errors frequently occur and the power
To return the entire navigation system to the
ate content may have been recorded in the mem-
default or factory settings, initialize the naviga-
ory or the hard disk drive. In such a case, the
tion system in the following order:
normal operation may be restored by clearing the
1. Press the RESET button on the hard-
ware.
setting values stored in the hard disk drive. For
the contents to be cleared, see the list presented
later.
2. Initialize the user data area on the hard
disk drive.
3. Clear the learned data in the sensor.
1 Start the engine.
1 Turn the ignition switch off.
After a little time, the start-up screen comes
on for a few seconds.
2 Press the RESET button.
2 Touch and hold the MAP button while the
start-up screen is displayed.
3 Start the engine.
After a little time, the start-up screen comes
on for a few seconds.
The Clear memory screen appears.
3 Touch [Reset].
4 Touch and hold the MAP button while the
start-up screen is displayed.
4 Touch [Yes].
The Clear memory screen appears.
The setting values stored in the hard disk drive
return to the default or factory settings. After
that, the navigation opening screen appears.
5 Touch [Clear user information from hard
disk].
❒ This reset operation clears all music data
recorded in the music library. Note that the
cleared data cannot be restored.
6 Touch [Yes].
The user area in the hard disk drive is initial-
ized. After that, the navigation system restarts.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Press the MENU button and then touch
[Settings].
Adjusting the Response Posi-
tions of the Touch Panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
The setting menu appears.
8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D
Calibration Status].
If you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi-
ate from the actual positions that respond to your
touch, adjust the response positions of the touch
panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point
adjustment, in which you touch four corners of
the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which
you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen.
9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch
[Reset All].
❒ Make sure to use the supplied stylus for
adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch
panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp
pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a
mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is
damaged.
Stylus (supplied with navigation system)
1 Press the V button.
The Picture Adjust screen appears.
2 Press and hold the V button for two sec-
onds or more.
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on the
four corners of the screen with the touch
panel adjustment pen.
Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of
the four arrows turns red.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Press the V button.
Positioning Technology
The adjusted position data is saved.
❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
The navigation system accurately measures your
current location by combining the positioning by
GPS and by Dead Reckoning.
❒ Press the MAP button to complete the 4-
point adjustment.
Positioning by GPS
5 Press the V button.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a net-
work of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the
satellites, which orbit at a height of 68 900 000
feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio sig-
nals giving time and position information. This
ensures that signals from at least three can be
picked up from any open area on the ground’s
surface.
6 Gently touch the center of the + mark dis-
played on the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved.
❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
The accuracy of the GPS information depends on
how good the reception is. When the signals are
strong and reception is good, GPS can determine
latitude, longitude, and altitude for accurate posi-
tioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality
is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longi-
tude, can be obtained and positioning errors are
somewhat greater.
❒ Press the V button to return to the previ-
ous adjustment position.
❒ To cancel the adjustment, press the MAP
button.
7 Press the MAP button.
The adjustment is complete.
❒ If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-
formed properly, consult your local Pio-
neer dealer.
Positioning by dead reckoning
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction with
the Gyrosensor, and inclination of the road with
the G sensor.
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepan-
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving
along winding roads or up slopes. Also, the navi-
gation system learns the driving conditions and
stores information in the memory; thus, as you
drive more, the precision of the positioning
becomes more accurate.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may
suddenly increase because of difference in
wheel diameter. The system detects the fact
that the tire diameter has changed, and auto-
matically replaces the value for calculating
distance.
The method of positioning changes as follows
depending on whether the speed pulse of your
vehicle is detected or not:
3D hybrid mode
This is active when the speed pulse is detected.
Inclination of a street can be detected.
❒ If the ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-
ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance cal-
culation value cannot be replaced
automatically.
Simple hybrid mode
When the speed pulse is not detected, position-
ing is performed in this mode. Only horizontal
movement is detected, so it becomes less accu-
rate. Also, when the positioning by GPS is not
available, such as when your vehicle enters a
long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual
and calculated position may become bigger.
Map matching
As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning sys-
tems used by this navigation system are suscepti-
ble to certain errors. Their calculations may, on
occasion, place you in a location on the map
where no road exists. In this situation, the pro-
cessing system understands that vehicles travel
only on roads, and can correct your position by
adjusting it to a nearby road. This is called map
matching.
❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed
sensing circuit. The location of this speed
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle
model. In some cases, it is impossible to
make a connection to it, and in such a case
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse
generator (sold separately) be used.
How do GPS and dead reckon-
ing work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation system
continually compares GPS data with your esti-
mated position as calculated from the data of 3D
Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data from the
3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period,
positioning errors are gradually compounded
until the estimated position becomes unreliable.
For this reason, whenever GPS signals are avail-
able, they are matched with the data of the 3D
Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved
accuracy.
With map matching
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckon-
ing system learns with experience. By comparing
the position it estimates with your actual position
as obtained using GPS, it can correct for various
types of error, such as tire wear and the rolling
motion of your vehicle. As you drive, the dead
reckoning system gradually gathers more data,
learns more, and the accuracy of its estimates
gradually increases. So, after you have driven
some distance, you can expect your position as
shown on the map to show fewer errors.
Without map matching
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If a car phone or cellular phone is used near
the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost
temporarily.
Handling Large Errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com-
bining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map match-
ing. However, in some situations, these functions
may not work properly, and the error may become
bigger.
• Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint
or car wax, because this may block the recep-
tion of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also
degrade the signals, so keep the antenna
clear.
❒ If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be
received, learning and error correction are not
possible. If GPS positioning has been operat-
ing for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual
position and the current location mark on the
map may diverge considerably. Once GPS
reception is restored, accuracy will be recov-
ered.
When the positioning by GPS is
impossible
• If signals cannot be received from more than
two GPS satellites, GPS positioning does not
take place.
• In some driving conditions, signals from GPS
satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this
case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS
positioning.
Vehicles that Cannot Obtain
Speed Pulse Data
❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed
sensing circuit. The location of this speed
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle
model. In some cases, it is impossible to
make a connection to it, and in such a case
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse
generator (sold separately) be used.
In tunnels or enclosed parking garages
Conditions Likely to Cause
Noticeable Positioning Errors
For various reasons such as the state of the road
you are traveling on and the state of reception of
the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle
may differ from the position displayed on the map
screen.
Under elevated roads or similar structures
• If you make a shallow turn.
When driving among high buildings
When driving through a dense forest or tall trees
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If there is a parallel road.
• If there is a loop or similar road configuration.
• If you take a ferry.
• If there is another road very nearby, such as in
the case of an elevated freeway.
• If you are driving on a long, straight road or a
gently curving road.
• If you take a recently opened road that is not on
the map.
• If you are on a steep mountain road with many
height changes.
• If you drive in zig-zags.
• If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot or
similar using a spiral ramp.
• If the road has connected hairpin bends.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi-
lar structure.
• If you join the road after driving around a large
parking lot.
• When you pass around a traffic circle.
• If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
• When starting driving immediately after start-
ing the engine.
• If you turn your navigation system on while
driving.
• If you put on chains, or change your tires for
ones with a different size.
Some types of vehicles may not output a speed
signal while driving at just a few kilometers per
hour. In such a case, the current location of your
vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a
traffic congestion or in a parking lot.
• If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig-
nals for a considerable period.
• If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop
manner, as in a traffic congestion.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common prob-
lems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it
should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, con-
tact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems in the screen
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Power doesn’t turn on. The naviga-
tion system doesn’t operate.
Leads and connectors are incorrectly Confirm once more that all connec-
connected.
tions are correct.
The fuse is blown.
Rectify the reason for the fuse blow-
ing, then replace the fuse. Be very
sure to install a correct fuse with the
same rate.
Noise and other factors are causing Refer to “Returning the Navigation
the internal memory to operate incor- System to the Default or Factory Set-
rectly.
tings” and carry out appropriate
The hard disk drive can not work
because the temperature is
extremely low or high.
Wait until the temperature inside the
vehicle falls or rises.
When the ignition switch is turned
ON (or turned to ACC), the motor
sounds.
This system confirms whether a disc This is a normal operation.
is loaded or not.
The navigation does not boot up.
The power cable is not wired cor-
rectly.
Turn the system off and the check
the wiring.
The hard disk drive cannot run Wait until the inside of the vehicle
because the temperature is too low. warms up.
The hard disk drive is defective.
Consult your authorised Pioneer
dealer.
You cannot position your vehicle on
the map or the positioning error is
large.
The quality of signals from the GPS
satellites is poor, causing reduced
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of antenna if necessary, or continue
signal quality may happen for the fol- driving until reception improves.
Check the GPS signal reception (➞
Page 93) and the position of the GPS
lowing reasons:
Keep the antenna clear.
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuit-
able location.
• Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
• The position of satellites relative to
your vehicle is bad.
• Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce
accuracy. (GPS satellites are oper-
ated by the US Department of
Defense, and the US government
reserves the right to distort posi-
tioning data for military reasons.
This may lead to greater position-
ing errors.)
• If a vehicle phone or cellular phone
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS
reception may be lost temporarily.
• Do not cover the GPS antenna with
spray paint or vehicle wax, because
this may block the reception of
GPS signals. Snow buildup can
also degrade the signals.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Signals from the vehicle’s speed
pulse are not being picked up prop-
erly.
Check that the cables are properly
connected. If necessary, consult the
dealer that installed the system.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.
Check that the navigation system is
securely mounted and, if necessary,
consult the dealer that installed the
system.
Your vehicle is operating in Simple
hybrid mode.
Connect the speed signal input (pink
lead wire) of the power cable cor-
rectly, and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen-
sor memory ([Learning Status]).
The navigation system is installed
Confirm the installation angle. (The
with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed
limitation of the installation angle.
within the allowed installation angle.
For details, refer to “Installation Man-
ual” and [Installation Angle Setup]
on page 94.)
Indication of the position of your vehi- Check whether or not the reverse
cle is misaligned after a U-turn or
reversing.
gear signal input lead (purple) is con-
nected properly. (The navigation sys-
tem works properly without the lead
connected, but positioning accuracy
will be adversely affected.)
The map continually reorients itself.
The traveling direction is always set
to Heading Up.
Touch
the map display.
on the screen and change
The daylight display is used even
when the vehicle lights are on.
[Daytime] is selected to [Day/Night Check the [Day/Night Display] set-
Display].
[Automatic] is selected.
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The display is very dim.
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about the [Day/Night Dis-
[Nighttime] is selected on [Day/
Night Display].
desired, select [Daytime].
The vehicle cabin temperature is
extremely low.
A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is
used, and such displays tend to
darken when cold. Wait for the vehi-
cle to warm up.
Picture quality adjustment of the dis- Refer to “Operating the Picture
play is not correct.
the picture quality.
Display tilt is not proper setting.
Press and hold EJECT button to
adjust the tilt.
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
The volume level is low.
Adjust the volume level.
Turn the attenuator or mute off.
Check the connection.
The attenuator or mute is on.
The speaker lead is disconnected.
Volume of beeps and navigation
guidance cannot be adjusted.
You cannot adjust these parameters Turn the volume up or down with
with the VOL (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
[Volume] in the [Settings] menu.
Adjusting the volume of navigation
guidance and beep is not possible.
You cannot adjust them with the
VOL (ꢀ/ꢁ) button.
Turn the volume up or down accord-
Settings menu.
A strange sound is heard when the
vehicle comes close to a certain
place. (E.g. Dog barking)
The sound for the registered location Set the sound of that registered loca-
is set.
Slope is not displayed on the Vehi- The speed pulse lead is not con-
Connect the speed pulse lead.
cle Dynamics screen. Inclination
does not move on the 3D Calibra-
tion screen.
nected.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
No sound, no voice.
“Guide Mute” has been set, or sound Adjust the volume of the guidance or
volume is reduced to 0.
turn “Guide Mute” off.
Refer to “Setting the volume Related
to the Guidance and Phone” (➞
Page 91).
When the screen is frozen...
Park your vehicle at a safe place, and cut off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc off”. Then
start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. If this does not solve the
problem, press the RESET button on the navigation system.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
CD or DVD playback is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down.
The disc is dirty.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean disc.
The disc is cracked or otherwise
damaged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
The files on the CD are an irregular
file format.
Check the file format. (Refer to
[Handing and care of the disc] on the
Hardware Manual.)
The CD format cannot be played
back.
Replace disc. (Refer to [Handing and
care of the disc] on the Hardware
Manual.)
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is. ( ➞
cannot play.
Hardware Manual)
No picture.
The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied.
Connect a parking brake lead cor-
rectly, and apply the parking brake.
Parking brake interlock is activated.
Park your vehicle in the safe place
and apply the parking brake.
➲
Parking brake interlock ➞
[AV Input] setting is incorrect.
Please read the following page and
set the setting correctly.
Audio skipping.
The navigation system is not firmly
secured.
Secure the navigation system firmly.
Failure hard disk drive.
Consult your Pioneer dealer.
“Rear display” picture disappears.
The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is
incorrect.
Please read the following page and
set the rear screen setting correctly.
There was a problem with the “Rear
display” or a faulty wiring connec-
tion, for example.
Check the “Rear display” and its con-
nection.
When the shift lever is in [R], displays Select [DVD] or [AV] in REAR
rear view camera images. (When
[MIRROR] is selected in REAR
SCREEN menu.)
SCREEN menu. When you move the
shift lever other than [R] position, the
screen will be returned to the previ-
ous display.
[DVD-V Setup] is carried out
You can not display the video image
to “Rear display” during [DVD-V
Setup] menu.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Nothing is displayed and the touch
panel keys cannot use.
The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera cor-
is incorrect.
rectly.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not
connected.
Press the AV button to return to the
source display and then select the
correct polarity setting for Camera
Input.
➲
The back light of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Press the V button to turn on the
back light.
Touch panel key is not respond or dif- Touch keys deviate from the actual
Perform the touch panel calibration.
ferent key is respond.
positions that respond to your touch “Adjusting the Response Positions of
for some reason.
the Touch Panels (Touch Panel Cali-
CD recording is not possible.
The disc cannot record, such as MP3 The disc other than normal music CD
disc, DVD-video, is inserted. can not be recorded.
Music Library recording will be can- Wait until the current track is ended
CD recording doesn’t stop though
the record progress indicator shows celed after playback of the current
or change the source manually.
100%.
track is finished. (The recording
mode stops at the interval of the
tracks.)
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the right While waiting for a response from
Wait for a while and try the operation
again.
corner on the map.
the XM tuner.
You are in an area that cannot
receive XM tuner reception.
Move into an area that can receive
XM tuner reception.
Your current location provides very
poor reception.
Change your location.
“UPDATING” is displayed at the right Service subscription is either
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of
receiving both XM audio and XM
NavTraffic service, if you are sub-
scribed to only one or the other, the
system checks to see if you have
added another service to your
corner on the map.
XM audio only or XM NavTraffic
stand alone.
account since you last powered on
the navigation system. When you
subscribe to both services, this mes-
sage will stop appearing when you
turn the ignition ON (ACC ON).
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and How to React to Them
Messages for navigation functions
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.
❒ There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a
case, follow the instructions given on the display.
Message
When
What to do
Irregular speed pulse signal
detected. Please power off the sys-
tem and check the installation. Then,
please re-boot the system and press
“OK”.
If the navigation system does not
receive the vehicle speed pulse.
Consult your Pioneer dealer.
Speed pulse not connected. Calibra- The speed signal input (pink lead
tion will start without speed pulse. wire) of the power cable is not con-
Accuracy is not fully ensured without nected.
speed pulse.
To operate with 3D hybrid mode, con-
nect the speed signal input (pink
lead wire) of the power cable cor-
rectly.
Although it can be operated with
Simple hybrid mode without con-
necting the speed signal input, the
precision of the positioning will be
less accurate.
Vibration detected. Please power off The navigation unit is installed in a
Re-install the navigation unit in a
place where the unit will not be
affected by vibration.
the system and check the installa-
place where it may be affected by a
tion. Then, please re-boot the system large vibration.
and press “OK”.
Direction of G sensor is not correct.
Please power off the system and
check the installation. Then, please
re-boot the system and press “OK”.
Direction of G sensor is set incor-
rectly.
See the Installation Manual and set
the direction of the navigation unit
correctly.
Gyro Sensor is not working properly. Abnormal output of Gyrosensor is
Please consult your dealer or Pioneer detected.
service center.
Note down the error code shown on
the screen; turn off the power, and
then contact your nearest Pioneer
service facility.
Positioning is not possible due to the The location display is not possible
hardware. Please contact your dealer due to failure of hardware.
or Pioneer service center.
Consult your dealer.
GPS antenna problem detected.
The location display is not possible
Consult your dealer.
Please contact your dealer or Pioneer due to failure of GPS antenna.
service center.
This function is not available now.
The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches
Vehicle Dynamics Display.
Because the sensor has not been
taught so the sensor information
cannot be acquired.
the Sensor Initializing status or more,
the system is ready to be used.
The vertical installation angle is
changed. Gyro Sensor calibration is
re-initialized.
If the mounting angle of the Hide-
away unit has been changed.
The system initializes the sensor in
order to operate it with the maximum
performance and automatically
starts re-learning.
Excess vertical installation angle
detected. Please install the naviga-
tion unit correctly.
The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed
limitation of the installation angle.
Confirm the installation angle. (The
within the allowed installation angle.
For details, refer to Installation Man-
ual.)
No data available at this time.
If no data is available that can be
used with the XM tuner.
Wait for a while and try the operation
again.
“UPDATING” is displayed at the right Radio is being updated with the lat-
Wait until the encryption code is fully
updated.
corner on the map
est encryption code.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
UPDATING (Updating)
The selected channel is not included Select another channel.
in your subscription.
Radio is being updated with the lat-
est encryption code.
Wait until the encryption code is fully
updated.
Route calculation was not possible.
Route calculation has failed because • Change the destination.
of malfunction of map data, software, • Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
hardware.
this message persists.
Route calculation was not possible
because the destination is too far.
If the destination is too far.
• Set a destination closer to the start-
ing point.
• Set one or more waypoints.
Route calculation was not possible
because the destination is too near.
The destination or waypoint(s) are
too close.
Set a destination [and waypoint(s)]
farther from the starting point.
Route calculation was not possible
due to traffic regulations.
• The destination or waypoint(s) are
in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and
the route calculation is hampered.
• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-
trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the
• Set a destination and waypoint(s)
outside the CTR if you know where
the restricted area is.
• Try the destination or waypoint(s)
away from the currently set points
to some extent.
route calculation is hampered.
• Drive your vehicle to an unre-
stricted area and reset the destina-
tion and waypoint(s).
Route calculation was not possible
because no guidance can be pro-
vided around the destination or the
starting point.
The destination, waypoint(s), or start- • Set a destination and waypoint(s)
ing point are in an area where no on roads.
road exists (e.g. a mountain) and the • Reset the destination after you
route calculation is impossible. drive the vehicle to any road.
Route to destination cannot be cal-
culated.
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.
an isolated island, etc. without a ferry
and the route calculation is impossi-
ble. If there is no road connect to
your starting point or destination,
this message will appear.
• Ferry could not be avoided.
• Toll road could not be avoided.
• Freeways could not be avoided.
• Toll roads, ferries and freeways
could not be avoided.
In case a ferry route, toll roads or
freeways are included in the route to destination or waypoints that do not
the destination or waypoints even
though a route is set to avoid them.
You can recognize these condition by
If the current route is not desired, set
pass through a ferry route, toll roads
or freeways.
• Toll roads and ferries could not be icon.
avoided.
➲
• Toll roads and freeways could not
be avoided.
• Ferries and freeways could not be
avoided.
The address does not exist.
Do you want to continue?
If the house number entered does
not exist in the database for the spec- Or, proceed to the next step without
Re-enter the existing house number.
ified street.
entering the house number and set
the main point of that street as your
destination.
This area does not contain any POI’s Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move
of the selected type.
not exist in the surrounding areas.
to another location and perform the
[Vicinity Search] again.
Failed to make the route profile.
In rarely case the route calculation
error may occur.
• Retry.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
this message persists.
There is no Traffic List.
There is no available traffic informa- Move to the location where you can
tion now.
receive the XM NavTraffic informa-
tion, and then try the operation
again.
There is no /Pictures/ folder.
Please create /Pictures/ folder and
store JPEG files in that Folder.
Cannot load the image because the
Pictures folder is not found in the
inserted disc.
Use the appropriate data after read-
ing “Limitations for import the pic-
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
Data read error.
Failed to read the data because the
CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the
Try re-reading the data by inserting a
clean CD-R.
pick-up lens of the DVD drive is dirty. Clean the pick-up lens with a com-
mercially available cleaning kit for
DVD, then try to reading again.
The Pictures folder exists on the CD- Use the appropriate data after read-
R but no data in JPEG format exists. ing “Limitations for import the pic-
ture” on page 97.
JPEG file is corrupt.
The data is damaged or an attempt
Use the appropriate data after read-
was made to set a JPEG image, that ing “Limitations for import the pic-
is out of specifications, as the back-
ground picture.
ture” on page 97.
CAUTION!
Parking brake lead is incorrectly con- Confirm once more that their con-
nected. nections are correct.
System detected improper connec-
tion of Parking Brake lead.
Please check your configuration for
safety. Please see Operation Manual
for more information regarding safe
operation.
Connection failed.
• The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire- • Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth
less technology is turned off .
• The mobile phone is pared (con-
nected) with another device.
wireless technology on.
• Cancel the paring (connection) and
retry.
• Rejection by the mobile phone has • Operate target phone and accept
received.
the connection request from the
navigation system. (Furthermore,
check the setting related connec-
tion on your mobile phone.)
• Check whether your mobile phone
is turned off or not, whether the dis-
tance to your mobile phone is too
far or not.
• The target mobile phone can not be
found.
• Registration step has been suc-
cessful but connection is fail for
some reason.
• Retry the registration and if a con-
nection still cannot be established,
try connecting using your mobile
phone.
Registration failed.
• The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire- • Keep turning the target phone’s
less technology is turned off during
the registration step.
Bluetooth wireless technology on
during the registration.
• Rejection by the mobile phone has • Operate target phone and accept
received.
• Registration step is fail for some
reason.
the registration request from the
navigation system. (Furthermore,
check the setting related connec-
tion on your mobile phone.
• Retry the registration and if a regis-
tration still cannot be failed, try reg-
istering using your mobile phone.
Automatic connection in progress.
Please try again later
If you try to perform another opera-
tion during automatic connection by • Establish that connection tempo-
• Wait for a while and retry.
the system.
rarily and retry that later.
Automatic connection in progress.
Please try manually later
If you try to connect another phone
during automatic connection by the rarily and retry that later.
system.
Establish that connection tempo-
Could not find any available phone.
No available phone is exist on the
surroundings when the system
search the mobile phone featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology for
registration.
• Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth
wireless technology on.
• Check whether your mobile phone
is turned off or not, whether the dis-
tance to your mobile phone is too
far or not.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
Bluetooth unit error. It is not possible If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected • Check the connection and retry.
to find any cell phones.
from this navigation system or Blue- • Establish that connection tempo-
tooth unit carry out another process-
ing when the system search the
mobile phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology for registration.
rarily and retry that later.
Bluetooth unit error. The device
name could not be set.
If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected • Check the connection and retry.
from this navigation system or Blue- • Establish that connection tempo-
tooth unit carry out another process-
ing when you change the device
name.
rarily and retry that later.
Registration is not available.
Reading failed.
If you try to perform another opera-
tion immediately after failure the con-
nection.
Wait for a while and retry.
• If you transferred the data from
your mobile phone by a format can
• Select just a suitable item, format
and then retry.
not be received with navigation sys- • Connect your mobile phone again
tem.
• Disconnection has been made dur-
ing transfer for some reason.
and retry.
Calibration failed.
Please refer to the owner’s manual.
The touch panel calibration has not
been carried out with appropriate
steps.
Please read the instruction of touch
panel calibration and retry.
The HDD is not connected.
Cannot use HDD.
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
occur, such as internal electrical
problem or file system error, etc.
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
occur, such as internal electrical
problem or file system error, etc.
There is no applicable program.
Failure of the built-in hard disk drive Consult your dealer.
occur, such as internal electrical
problem or file system error, etc.
The HDD cannot be operated due to Hard disk drive can not run due to
excessive heat. Please turn off power high temperature.
immediately.
Before using the system again,
please change the location of the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle to safe place, turn
the ignition switch off and wait until
the temperature inside the vehicle
drops.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages for Audio functions
When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the table
below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact
your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.
Built-in DVD drive
Message
When
What to do
Unreadable disc.
If you try to use a disc which is incom-
patible with this system.
Insert a suitable disc.
If you insert a disc upside down.
If the disc is dirty.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean the disc.
If the disc is cracked or otherwise dam- Insert a normal, round disc.
aged.
Mechanical failure of DVD drive occur.
Electrical or mechanical error is occur.
Consult your Pioneer dealer.
Playback error.
Please remove the disc.
Press the RESET button. (“Hardware
manual.)
Region code error
The disc does not have the same region Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing
number as the navigation system. the correct region number.
The temperature of built-in DVD drive is Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the
Playback error due to irregu-
lar temperature. Please
remove the disc.
out of the operating limits.
ignition switch off and wait until the
built-in DVD drive’s temperature returns
to within normal operating limits.
ATTENTION!
Parking brake interlock is activated.
Park your vehicle in the safe place and
apply the parking brake.
Viewing of front seat video
source while driving is strictly
prohibited.
➲
Search error
If the title number, chapter number,
Enter the available numbers or 10 key
time, 10 key command, which you enter command or use another search
in [10Key Search] are not exist. (This
message will appear when DVD drive
can not accept that command.)
method.
Hard disk drive (Music Library)
Message
When
What to do
This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibit second- Use another CD and retry.
generation copies or duplicate.
• Recording error.
If recording can not be carried out with • Clean the disc and retry.
Switching to CD playback skipping certain part of the disc continu- • Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-
mode
• Recording error.
Recording is stopped
ously because the disc is dirty,
scratched, otherwise damaged, the pick-
up lens of the DVD drive is dirty, or the
cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then
retry.
• Retry in vibration-free condition.
• The recording was unsta- extreme vibration occur continuously.
ble. Restart the recording
from the beginning of the
track.
Exceeded playlist maxi-
mum. No more playlists can playlists are maximum number. (The
be recorded.
If you try to record a new CD but the
Delete some playlist and retry.
Consult your dealer.
album playlist can be stores up to 400.)
Playback error. Music
Library cannot be played
The music library component is abnor-
mal.
MyMix cannot store more
than 99 tracks.
If you try to add the tracks but the MyMix Delete some tracks and retry.
playlists are maximum number. (The
MyMix playlist can store the tracks up to
99.)
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
This track cannot be added The music library component is abnor-
Consult your dealer.
to MyMix
mal.
Name can not be used for
voice recognition. Try again. been entered and the system can not
convert it appropriate pronunciation.
In case some invalid character have
Enter the different characters so that the
system can pronounce that.
Single recording mode will Record the tracks other than the first
When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], the
only record the first track of track of CD when the recording mode is system only can record the first track of
CD
[Single].
CD. Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC
This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibit second- Use another CD and retry.
generation copies or duplicate.
HDD is full. This CD cannot There is no free space for recording in
be recorded the hard disk drive.
Unable to select appropriate Some corresponded data is found in
Delete some tracks or playlist and try again
if you want to record that CD.
Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve
the title by touching [Update title].
®
Track info due to multiple
entries in the database.
Gracenote Database, the system can-
not select one to append a title.
All artist names in the playl- If you try to delete the artist name
ist are deleted because no entirely. The artist will not be displayed
character is entered. Do you in the artist group and artist name on
If you enter the artist name again, the artist
name appears.
want to proceed?
the information plate also will not be dis-
played.
Other sources
Message
When
What to do
Search failed.
iPod is preparing playback.
Therefore, the operation is invalid now.
Wait until [Ready] disappear and try the
operation.
Invalid command - the
memo has not been stored.
• If you try to memorize 000 Channel to Tune the appropriate channel and memo-
MyMix.
rize that.
• If you try to memorize the channel
which is OFF AIR to MyMix.
• If you try to memorize the channel to
MyMix while the error of XM tuner
occur.
Invalid command - the CH
has not been stored.
• If you try to memorize 000 or 001 Chan- Tune the appropriate channel and memo-
nel to TRFC button ’s preset.
• If you try to memorize the channel
which is OFF AIR to TRFC button ’s
preset.
rize that.
• If you try to memorize the channel to
TRFC button ’s preset while the error
of XM tuner occur.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the hard disk drive is dis-
connected
Route Setting Information
Route search specifications
If there is no hard disk drive because of the repair
or service, you can operate Radio source only
without the hard disk drive.
Your navigation system sets a route to your desti-
nation by applying certain built-in rules to the
map data. This section provides some useful
information about how a route is set.
• When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route is automati-
cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-
lations, only information about traffic
regulations at the time when the route was
calculated is shown. One-way streets and
street closures may not be taken into con-
sideration. For example, if a street is open
during the morning only, but you arrive
later, it would be against the traffic regula-
tions so you cannot drive along the set
route. When driving, please follow the
actual traffic signs. Also, the system may
not know some traffic regulations.
Only following operation is available. Other func-
tions can not operate.
• Only FM, AM source can operate. (Preset sta-
tion select and can not operate.)
• If the selected source before ejecting the hard
disk drive is [AV]. [AV input] source is avail-
able on “Rear display”. (If the selected source
is [DVD], nothing is output to “Rear display”. If
the selected source is [MIRROR], Same
image as “Front display” is output to “Rear dis-
play”.)
• Rear view camera is available only when the
vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] is not
available.)
• The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the navi-
gation system whilst taking the type of streets
or traffic regulations into account. It is not nec-
essarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you
may not be able to set the streets you want to
pass. If you need to pass a certain street, set
the waypoint on that street.)
• The route set by your navigation system may
not use the streets known to local drivers, such
as small streets or special roads.
• Some route options may become the same
route. If waypoints are set, only one route is
calculated.
• If the destination is too far, there may be
instances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set waypoints along the
way.)
• During voice guidance, turns and intersections
from the freeway are announced. However, if
you pass intersections, turns, and other guide
points in rapid succession, some may not be
announced.
• It is possible that guidance may direct you off a
freeway and then back on again.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• In some cases, the route may require you to
travel in the opposite direction to your current
heading. In such cases, you are instructed to
turn around, so please turn around safely by
following the actual traffic rules.
Roads not used in calculations
Even though displayed onscreen, the following
roads are not included in route calculations.
• Walkway
• Public vehicle only
• Non access road
• In some cases, guidance may direct you past
your destination and then indicate a U-turn to
get back to it.
Page 48
• In some cases, a route may begin on the oppo-
site side of a railway or river from your actual
current location. If this happens, drive towards
your destination for a while, and try route cal-
culation again.
Tracking
• Your navigation system marks your course on
the map in certain increments. This is called
tracking. It is handy when you want to check a
route traveled without guidance or if returning
along a complex route.
• When there is a traffic congestion or closure
ahead, if driving through the traffic congestion
or closure is better than taking the detour, a
detour route may not appear.
• There may be instances when the starting
point and the destination point are not on the
highlighted route.
• The number of traffic circle exits displayed on
the screen may differ from the actual number
of roads.
• A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) is
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,
tracking marks are erased in order from the
most distant. Tracking display shows about
100 miles tracking of your vehicle with white
dots.
➲ Tracking can also be set for automatic erasing
whenever the navigation system is switched
Auto Reroute
• Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more
than 0.01 mi (Approx. 15m) from the route.
• The Auto Reroute function does not work in the
following cases:
Displaying POI
Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed on
the enlarged map of the intersection or [Driver’s
View] (left screen) are only the special Points of
Interest (POI) that contain the position informa-
tion. Not all of Points of Interests (POI) are dis-
played.
- when your vehicle is not on a street
- when you are too close to your destination
- when your vehicle is on a ferry
- when driving on a road inside a facility
- when driving on a traffic circle
- when driving on the routes are described in
[Roads not used in calculations]
Route highlighting
• Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
green or light blue on the map.
• The immediate vicinity of your starting point
and destination may not be highlighted, and
neither will areas with particularly complex
road layouts. Consequently, the route may
appear to be cut off on the display, but voice
guidance will continue.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTS
Glossary
This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a sur-
round system delivering multi-channel audio from up to
6 independent channels.
This glossary explains some of the terms used in
the manual.
3D Hybrid sensor
The built-in sensor which enables the system to estimate
your vehicle’s position. A learning function increases its
accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.
Favorite location
A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or
a relative’s home) that you can register to allow easy
routing.
Address Book
A list of previously searched destinations, waypoints and
locations registered manually.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that
provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular
display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays
have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture
for exceptional presence and atmosphere.
Gracenote® Music recognition service
Music recognition technology and related data are pro-
®
vided by Gracenote . Gracenote is the industry standard
Bit rate
in music recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
This expresses data volume per second, or bps units
(bits per second). The higher the rate, the more informa-
tion is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same
encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the
better the sound.
Guidance mode
The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your
destination; the system automatically switches to this
mode as soon as a route has been set.
Chapter
DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are
numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book.
With DVD-Video discs featuring chapters, you can
quickly find a desired scene with chapter search.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your route, gener-
ally intersections. The next guidance point along your
route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your current loca-
tion is shown on the map by a red triangle mark.
Home location
Your registered home location.
ID3 tag
Default setting
This is a method of embedding track-related information
in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include
the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the
music genre, the year of production, comments and
other data. The contents can be freely edited using soft-
ware with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags
are restricted to the number of characters, the informa-
tion can be viewed when the track is played back.
A factory setting which applies when you first switch on
the system; you can change default settings to suit your
own needs in the Route Options menu or the Settings
menu.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your journey.
Dolby Digital
ISO9660 format
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to
5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby
Digital surround sound system used in theaters.
This is the international standard for the format logic of
CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there
are regulations for the following two levels.
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to
8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-
byte numerals and the [_] sign, with a file-extension of
three characters.)
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including
Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin-
gle DVD, letting you choose as desired.
the separation mark [.] and a file extension). Each folder
contains less than 8 hierarchies.
Optical digital output
Extended formats
Joliet:
By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format,
the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of
transmission is minimized. An optical digital output is
designed to transmit digital signals optically.
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
Packet write
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is
the signal recording system used for music CDs and
DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sam-
pling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs
can provide higher sound quality.
This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R,
etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with
files on floppy or hard discs.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented
scenes feature parental lock which prevents children
from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you
set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes
inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these
scenes will be skipped.
m3u
Playlists created using the [WINAMP] software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
Menu
A list of options shown on the display; choices are
selected touching the display.
Point of Interest (POI)
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in
the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,
and amusement parks.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio com-
pression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the
ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able
to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a
conventional disc.
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi-
cating the area in which they were purchased. Playback
of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same
region number as the DVD player. The navigation sys-
tem’s region number is displayed on the bottom of the
display unit.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an
international “Video image” compression standard.
Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and
recorded using this system.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a specific
location; route setting is done automatically by the sys-
tem when you specify a destination.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras
are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images
from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV.
Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles,
letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your destination.
It is highlighted in bright green on the map.
Title
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
DVD-Video discs have high data capacity, enabling
recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for
example, one disc contains three separate movies, they
are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you
enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple lan-
guages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on
a single disc, letting you choose as desired.
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that allows addi-
tional data to be recorded later. When recording data on
a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from begin-
ning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-
session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions
in one disc.
Tracking
Marks on the map indicating the route you have traveled.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)
Different areas of the world use different TV systems.
North America uses NTSC, Europe uses PAL and
SECAM, and South America uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL
and NTSC.
Almost all are incompatible with each other. To display
the video image, such as TV or DVD-video correctly, you
may need to coordinate your system at the same TV sys-
tem or use a multisystem equipment.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking
CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexi-
bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio
compression, it is possible to achieve compression prior-
ity sound quality.
Voice guidance
The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in
guidance mode.
Voice recognition
The technology that allows the system to understand the
driver’s voice commands.
❒
In order to operate the navigation system by voice,
you need the microphone kit (CD-VC1), which is sold
separately. Please refer to the [Owner’s Manual] for
the microphone kit.
Way Point
A location that you choose to visit before your destina-
tion; a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints
and the destination.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shortcut menu
❒ The shortcuts displayed on screen can be changed. The shortcuts described here are those that can
be selected with the system as default setting.
❒ Items marked with an asterisk (*) can not be removed from the shortcut menu.
Shortcut menu
: Destination*
: Route Options*
: Registration
: Vicinity Search
: Overlay POI
: Volume
Route Condition
Avoid Toll Road
Avoid Ferry
Avoid Freeway
Learning Route
: Phone book
: Dial Favorite 1 to 5
: Whole Route Overview
: Stock Info
: Browse
: My Favorites
: Traffic On Route
: Traffic Events
: Day/Night Display
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL:55-9178-4270
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2006 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan
<CRB2184-A> UC
<KYGHF> <06B00001>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|